You are on page 1of 388



'LI'LI'LI

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SAFETY INFORMATION
This section contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To
achieve optimum utility of this device, all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions
in this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.

Please read the next section before using this device. It contains important information related
to user safety and preventing equipment problems.
Make sure you observe all of the precautions listed in this manual.

*Please note that some parts of the contents of this section may not correspond with the purchased
product.

Warning and Precaution Symbols


Ignoring this warning could cause serious injury or
even death.
Ignoring this caution could cause injury or damage to
property.

Meaning of Symbols
A triangle indicates a danger against which you should take precaution.

This symbol warns against cause burns.

A diagonal line indicates a prohibited course of action.

This symbol warns against dismantling the device.

A black circle indicates an imperative course of action.

This symbol indicates you must unplug the device.

P-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

PL 02

Do not modify this product, as a fire, electrical shock, or breakdown could result.
If the product employs a laser, the laser beam source could cause blindness.
Do not attempt to remove the covers and panels which have been fixed to the
product. Some products have a high-voltage part or a laser beam source inside that
could cause an electrical shock or blindness.
Only use the power cord supplied in the package. Failure to use this cord could
result in a fire or electrical shock.
Use only the specified power source voltage. Failure to do that could result in a
fire or electrical shock.
Do not use a multiple outlet adapter to connect any other appliances or machines.
Use of a power outlet for more than the marked current value could result in a fire
or electrical shock.
Do not unplug and plug in the power cord with a wet hand, as an electrical shock
could result.

Plug the power cord all the way into the power outlet. Failure to do this could
result in a fire or electrical shock.

Do not scratch, abrade, place a heavy object on, heat, twist, bend, pull on, or damage the power cord. Use of a damaged power cord (exposed core wire, broken
wire, etc.) could result in a fire or breakdown.
Should any of these conditions be found, immediately turn OFF the power switch,
unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your authorized service representative.
In principle, do not use an extension cord. Use of an extension cord could cause a
fire or electrical shock. Contact your authorized service representative if an
extension cord is required.

P-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Do not place a flower vase or other container that contains water, or metal clips or
other small metallic objects on this product. Spilled water or metallic objects
dropped inside the product could result in a fire, electrical shock, or breakdown.
Should a piece of metal, water, or any other similar foreign matter get inside the
product, immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the
power outlet, and then call your authorized service representative.
If this product becomes inordinately hot or emits smoke, or unusual odor or noise,
immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power
outlet, and then call your authorized service representative. If you keep on using it
as is, a fire or electrical shock could result.
If this product has been dropped or its cover damaged, immediately turn OFF the
power switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your
authorized service representative. If you keep on using it as is, a fire or electrical
shock could result.
Do not throw the toner cartridge or toner into an open flame. The hot toner may
scatter and cause burns or other damage.

Connect the power cord to an electrical outlet that is equipped with a grounding
terminal.

P-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Do not use flammable sprays, liquids, or gases near this product, as a fire could
result.
Do not leave a toner unit or drum unit in a place within easy reach of children.
Licking or ingesting any of these things could injure your health.
Do not let any object plug the ventilation holes of this product. Heat could accumulate inside the product, resulting in a fire or malfunction.
Do not install this product at a site that is exposed to direct sunlight, or near an air
conditioner or heating apparatus. The resultant temperature changes inside the
product could cause a malfunction, fire, or electrical shock.
Do not place the product in a dusty place, or a site exposed to soot or steam, near a
kitchen table, bath, or a humidifier. A fire, electrical shock, or breakdown could
result.
Do not place this product on an unstable or tilted bench, or in a location subject to
a lot of vibration and shock. It could drop or fall, causing personal injury or
mechanical breakdown.
After installing this product, mount it on a secure base. If the unit moves or falls,
it may cause personal injury.
Do not store toner units and PC drum units near a floppy disk or watch that are
susceptible to magnetism. They could cause these products to malfunction.
The inside of this product has areas subject to high temperature, which may cause
burns. When checking the inside of the unit for malfunctions such as a paper misfeed, do not touch the locations (around the fusing unit, etc.) which are indicated by
a Caution ! High Temperature ! warning label.
Do not place any objects around the power plug as the power plug may be difficult
to pull out when an emergency occurs.

The socket-outlet shall be installed near the machine and shall be easily accessible
as the power plug may be difficult to pull out when an emergency occurs.

P-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Always use this product in a well ventilated location. Operating the product in a
poorly ventilated room for an extended period of time could injure your health.
Ventilate the room at regular intervals.
Whenever moving this product, be sure to disconnect the power cord and other
cables. Failure to do this could damage the cord or cable, resulting in a fire, electrical shock, or breakdown.
When moving this product, always hold it by the locations specified in the operators manual or other documents. If the unit falls it may cause severe personal
injury. The product may also be damaged or malfunction.
Remove the power plug from the outlet more than one time a year and clean the
area between the plug terminals. Dust that accumulates between the plug terminals may cause a fire.
When unplugging the power cord, be sure to hold onto the plug. Pulling on the
power cord could damage the cord, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.

P-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Precautions for Routine Use


Do not store toner units, PC drum units, and other supplies and consumables in a
place subject to direct sunlight and high temperature and humidity, as poor
image quality and malfunction could result.
Do not attempt to replace the toner unit and PC drum unit in a place exposed to
direct sunlight. If the PC drum is exposed to intense light, poor image quality
could result.
Do not unpack a toner unit or PC drum unit until the very time of use. Do not
leave an unpacked unit standing. Install it immediately or poor image quality
could result.
Do not keep toner units and PC drum units in an upright position or upside
down, as poor image quality could result.
Do not throw or drop a toner unit or PC drum unit as poor image quality could
result.
Do not use this product in an area where ammonia or other gases or chemicals
are present. Failure to do so may shorten the service life of the product, cause
damage or decrease performance.
Do not use this product in an environment with a temperature outside the range
specified in the operators manual, as a breakdown or malfunction could result.
Do not attempt to feed stapled paper, carbon paper or aluminum foil through this
product, as a malfunction or fire could result.
Do not touch or scratch the surface of the toner unit, developing roller and the
PC drum, as poor image quality could result.

Use the supplies and consumables recommended by the dealer. Use of any supply or consumable not recommended could result in poor image quality and
breakdown.

P-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Miscellaneous
Do not rest your weight on the control panel, as a malfunction could result.
Normal international communications may at times not be possible depending
on line conditions.
If tap or well water is used in a humidifier, impurities in the water are discharged
into the air and may be deposited inside the printer, resulting in poor image quality. It is recommended that pure water that does not contain any impurities be
used in the humidifier.
The cooling fan may be activated automatically, but this suggests no problems.
Ni-MH (Nickel Metal Hydride) Batteries are installed inside machine as back up
memory batteries. Please dispose according to local, state and federal regulations.

PL 01 FAX

P-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have determined that this


machine meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy
efficiency.

What is an ENERGY STAR Products?


An ENERGY STAR product has a special feature that allows it to automatically switch to a lowpower mode after a period of inactivity. An ENERGY STAR product uses energy more efficienty,
saves you money on utility bills and helps protect the environment.

Recycled Paper (USA market only)


Your Minolta machine has been designed to use the following Recycled Paper
Minolta Recycled Bond
20% Post Consumer Waste

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Item No. 8925 701

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Thank you for choosing Minolta quality. For over 30 years Minolta has been a leader on the forefront
of office equipment technology and service. Our desire has always been to bring you highly reliable
products. We pledge to continue to provide you, our customer, with our state of the art equipment, as
well as full customer service for all our products. We look forward to a long healthy relationship with
you and our company. If you have any questions or comments about Minolta, our product or service,
please let us know. Our fax number is 800-237-8087 (for the U.S.A. and Canada). Thank you again.
This operators manual explains how to operate the machine and replenish its supplies. It also gives
some troubleshooting tips as well as general precautions to be observed when operating the machine.
To ensure the best performance and effective use of your machine, read this manual carefully until you
familiarize yourself thoroughly with its operation and features. After you have read through the
manual, keep it ready for reference.
Please use this manual as a quick and handy reference tool for immediately clarifying any questions
which may arise.
MC-F02

For the U.S.A. Users


FCC Part 15-Radio Frequency Devices
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case
the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
WARNING: The design and production of this unit conform to FCC Regulations, and any changes or
modifications must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control. Any changes made by
purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC
regulations.
FCC-F02

This device must be used with shielded interface cables. The use of non-shield cables is likely to result
in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under FCC rules.

For Canada Users


Interference-Causing Equipment Standard (ICES-003 Issue 3)
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numrique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
IC-F03

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ii

Contents
Safety Information............................................................................................... viii
Terms and Symbols for the Type of Originals and Copy Paper ......................... xiv
Chapter 1

Safety Notes
1. Installing the Copier
Installation Site ...............................................................................................
Power Source ..................................................................................................
Space Requirements........................................................................................
2. Precautions for Use
Operating Environment...................................................................................
Acoustic noise.................................................................................................
Using the Machine Properly ...........................................................................
Moving the Machine .......................................................................................
Care of Machine Supplies...............................................................................
Legal Restrictions on Copying .......................................................................

Chapter 2

1-2
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-4

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax


1. Typical Copies You Can Make with Your Copier
Typical copies you can make with your copier .............................................. 2-2
2. System Overview
System Overview ............................................................................................ 2-6
Di200f/Di251f/Di351f and Options................................................................ 2-6
Option ........................................................................................................... 2-12
A view from the Outside............................................................................... 2-16
Inside the Machine........................................................................................ 2-17
Fax Options: Identification and Functions.................................................... 2-18
3. Control Panel Keys and Touch Panel
Control Panel Keys and Indicators ............................................................... 2-19
What is the Touch Panel? ............................................................................. 2-20
Operating the Touch Panel ........................................................................... 2-20
How the Basic Screen is Organized.............................................................. 2-20
Icons.............................................................................................................. 2-24
4. Turning ON and OFF and Initial Mode
Turning ON and OFF.................................................................................... 2-25
When Machine is Turned ON ....................................................................... 2-25
Initial Mode................................................................................................... 2-25
5. Placing the Original
Using the Document Feeder ......................................................................... 2-26
Loading the Originals in Document Feeder.................................................. 2-27
Placing the Original on the Glass ................................................................. 2-30
Mixed Orig. Detection .................................................................................. 2-32
6. Auxiliary Functions
Auxiliary Functions ...................................................................................... 2-33

Chapter 3

Making Copies
1. Basic Copying Overview
Basic Copying Overview ................................................................................ 3-2
2. Selecting the Paper
Paper Size ....................................................................................................... 3-4
Manual Bypass Copying ................................................................................. 3-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

iii
Contents

3-12
3-18
3-20
3-26
3-30
3-30

3. Selecting the Zoom


Zoom Ratio...................................................................................................
4. Selecting the Finishing Function
Finishing Functions ......................................................................................
Selecting the Finishing Function..................................................................
Hints for Stapling Position ...........................................................................
Hints for Stapling .........................................................................................
Hints for Hole-Punching Position ................................................................
5. Selecting the Original Copy Type
Original Copy Type..................................................................................
Selecting the Original Copy Type............................................................
Some Precautions for Making Copies ..........................................................
Handy Feature Available from Initial Mode Setting....................................
6. Selecting the Density
Image Density ..............................................................................................
7. Auxiliary Functions
Cover ............................................................................................................
Page Insertion ...............................................................................................
OHP Interleaving..........................................................................................
File Margin ...................................................................................................
Edge/Frame Erase ........................................................................................
Image Repeat................................................................................................
Distribution...................................................................................................
Separate Scan ...............................................................................................
8. Using Memory Recall
Memory Recall.............................................................................................
Chapter 4

3-31
3-34
3-41
3-41
3-42
3-44
3-46
3-50
3-54
3-56
3-58
3-60
3-61
3-62

Typical Function Combinations


1. Making Different Types of Copy
Reading the Table........................................................................................... 4-2
Using 1-Sided Originals ................................................................................. 4-3
Using 2-Sided Originals with Filing Margin along Left Edges ..................... 4-9
Using 2-Sided Originals with Filing Margin along Top Edges ................... 4-15
2. Using Large-Size Originals
Precautions When Making Copies on 1117 L or Legal L.......................... 4-21

Chapter 5

Using the Facsimile


1. Using the Facsimile
Basic Faxing Procedures ................................................................................ 5-2
2. Sending Documents
Quick Memory Transmission......................................................................... 5-4
Using One-Touch Dialing for Transmission .................................................. 5-6
Using Abbreviated Dialing for Transmission ................................................ 5-7
Using Facsimile Program for Transmission................................................... 5-8
Adjusting Facsimile Image Quality................................................................ 5-9
Adjusting Facsimile Contrast ....................................................................... 5-10
Adjusting Facsimile Reduction .................................................................... 5-12
Defining the Area of Document to be Scanned for Transmission ............... 5-14
Chain Dialing ............................................................................................... 5-16
Setting the Communication Mode................................................................ 5-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

iv
Contents

When Transmission Fails..............................................................................


3. Receiving Documents
Automatic Reception and Manual Reception ...............................................
On Receiving Documents .............................................................................
4. Using Facsimile as Telephone
Using Your Fax Machine as a Telephone.....................................................
5. Using Activity List
Activity List ..................................................................................................
Specific Items That Can be Checked with Activity List ..............................
Selecting a Function Available from Activity List .......................................
Chapter 6

5-19
5-20
5-20
5-22
5-24
5-24
5-25

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile


1.Various Ways of Transmitting Documents
Serial Broadcast Transmission........................................................................ 6-2
Manual Transmission...................................................................................... 6-4
Relay Transmission......................................................................................... 6-5
Real Time Transmission ................................................................................. 6-6
Priority Transmission...................................................................................... 6-7
Timer Transmission ........................................................................................ 6-8
2in1 Transmission........................................................................................... 6-9
2-Sided Transmission ................................................................................... 6-10
TX Marker .................................................................................................... 6-12
TSI Information ............................................................................................ 6-14
Destination Insertion..................................................................................... 6-15
TX Report ..................................................................................................... 6-16
Remote Copy ................................................................................................ 6-17
Password TX................................................................................................. 6-18
2. Using Bulletin Boards
Posting a Document on a Bulletin Board...................................................... 6-19
Downloading a Document from a Bulletin Board (Retrieve)....................... 6-22
3. Using Applied Functions
Polling TX..................................................................................................... 6-24
Polling Reception and Start Timer................................................................ 6-26
4. Various Ways of Receiving Documents
Manual Reception ......................................................................................... 6-28
Password Reception ...................................................................................... 6-29
5. Using F CODE
What is F CODE? ......................................................................................... 6-30

Chapter 7

Setting the Utility Mode


1. Using the Utility Mode
Programming and Setting Screens .................................................................. 7-2
List of Programming/Setting Items................................................................. 7-4
2. Required Initial Programming Items and Confirmation of Initial Settings
Required Initial Programming Items .............................................................. 7-8
Checking the Initial Settings........................................................................... 7-8
3. Entering Characters
Alphanumeric Screen.................................................................................... 7-10
Entering Letters............................................................................................. 7-11
Entering Symbols.......................................................................................... 7-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

v
Contents

4. Job Memory Input and Job Recall


Job Memory Input ........................................................................................
Recalling a Job from Memory......................................................................
5. Meter Count
Using Meter Count .......................................................................................
6. Settings in User Management
Setting the Confirmation Beep and Alarm Volume .....................................
Using the Dehumidify Function ...................................................................
Using the Toner Replenisher Function.........................................................
Panel Cleaning..............................................................................................
Data Send .....................................................................................................
7. Settings for Report
Printing Reports and Lists ............................................................................
Chapter 8

7-12
7-15
7-16
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-20
7-21

Users Choice and FAX Input


1. Making the Users Choice Settings
Users Choice Functions ................................................................................ 8-2
Making the Users Choice Settings ................................................................ 8-7
2. Settings for FAX Input
FAX Input Items............................................................................................. 8-8
Selecting FAX Input....................................................................................... 8-9
Setting Abbreviated Dialing Numbers ......................................................... 8-10
Setting One-Touch Dialing Numbers........................................................... 8-16
Setting Indexes ............................................................................................. 8-22
Settings for Facsimile Programs .................................................................. 8-23
FAX Program Procedures ............................................................................ 8-24
Registering Relay Groups ............................................................................ 8-33
Self-Abbreviated Dialing ............................................................................. 8-34
Setting up a Bulletin Board .......................................................................... 8-35
Bultn. Procedures ......................................................................................... 8-36
Registering Account (Account Input) .......................................................... 8-38
Account Input Procedures ............................................................................ 8-40

Chapter 9

Using the Admin. Management Mode


1. Settings in Admin. Management
Admin. Management Mode............................................................................ 9-2
Setting Admin. Management.......................................................................... 9-2
Functions of Admin. Management................................................................. 9-3
2. Settings for Administrator Set
Administrator Set ........................................................................................... 9-4
3. Settings for Copy Track
Copy Track ..................................................................................................... 9-6
4. Settings for Input Accounts
Input Accounts ............................................................................................. 9-12
Input Accounts Procedures........................................................................... 9-14
5. Settings for Initial Settings
Initial Settings .............................................................................................. 9-18
Initial Settings Procedures............................................................................ 9-20
6. Settings for FAX Recept Settings
FAX Recept (Reception) Settings ................................................................ 9-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

vi
Contents

FAX Recept Settings Procedures..................................................................


7. Settings for FAX Trans. Settings
FAX Trans. Settings .....................................................................................
FAX Trans. Settings Procedures...................................................................
8. Settings for Account Meter
Account Meter Procedures............................................................................
9. Settings for Report Settings
Report Settings..............................................................................................
Report Settings Procedures ...........................................................................
10. Settings for Report Printing
Report Printing..............................................................................................
Report Printing Procedures ...........................................................................
Chapter 10

9-26
9-28
9-30
9-31
9-32
9-32
9-33
9-33

When a Message Appears


1. When the Message Replenish paper. Appears
Adding paper................................................................................................. 10-2
Memorize Paper Size .................................................................................... 10-8
2. When the Message Please add toner. Appears
Replacing the Toner Bottle ......................................................................... 10-10
3. When the Message Stapler empty. Appears
Reloading the Staple Cartridge ................................................................... 10-12
4. When the Message Please change Imaging Unit. Appears
Changing the Imaging Unit......................................................................... 10-16
5. When the Message Misfeed detected. Appears
Misfeed Location Displays ......................................................................... 10-18
Misfeed Clearing Procedures...................................................................... 10-19
6. When the Message Cannot staple. Appears
Clearing the Staple Misfeed........................................................................ 10-34
7. When a Size Error Message Appears
Clearing a Size Error................................................................................... 10-38
8. Replacing the TX Marker Stamp (Spare TX Marker STAMP)
How to Replace the TX Marker Stamp (Spare TX Marker STAMP) ........ 10-40
9. When the Message A malfunction was detected. Appears
When the message A malfunction was detected. appears ....................... 10-41
10. What Does Each Message Mean?
What does each message mean? ................................................................. 10-42
11. When This Type of Copy is Produced
When this type of copy is produced............................................................ 10-43
12. The Machine is not Functioning as Designed
The machine is not functioning as designed ............................................... 10-46
13. Facsimile is not Functioning Properly
Transmission Failures ................................................................................. 10-47
Reception Failures ...................................................................................... 10-48
Telephone Problems ................................................................................... 10-49

Chapter 11

Miscellaneous
1. Specifications
Specifications................................................................................................ 11-2
2. Care of the Copier
Cleaning ...................................................................................................... 11-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

vii
Contents

3. Function Combination Matrix


Function Combination Matrix ....................................................................
Conditions for Combined Functions ..........................................................
4. Description of Paper Size and Zoom Ratio Table
List of Paper Sizes and Zoom Ratios .........................................................
5. Terms and Definitions
Terms and Definitions ................................................................................
6. Power Failure
Should Power Failure Occurs.....................................................................
Index

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

11-12
11-14
11-15
11-16
11-18

viii

Safety Information
FCC Part 68-Telecommunication Devices
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the rear panel of this equipment is a label that
contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and Ringer Equivalence Number (REN)
for this equipment. If requested, provide this information to your telephone company.
This equipment uses THE FOLLOWING USOC JACKS: RJ11C.
The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices you may connect to your telephone line and still
have all of those devices ring when your number is called. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs
of all devices should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to
your line, as determined by the REN, you should call your local telephone company to determine the
maximum REN for your calling area.
If your telephone equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the Telephone Company may
discontinue your service temporarily. If possible, they will notify you in advance. But if advance notice
isnt practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be advised of your right to file a
complaint with the FCC.
Your telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that
could affect the proper operation of your equipment. If they do, you will be given advance notice so as to
give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, please contact:
Minolta Corporation
101 Williams Drive Ramsey.
New Jersey 07446
U.S.A.
The telephone company may ask you to disconnect this equipment from the network until the problem
has been corrected or you are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning.
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party
lines is subject to state tariffs. (Contact your state public utility commission or corporation commission
for information.)
CUSTOMER INFORMATION FOR PRIVATELY OWNED COIN PHONES
To comply with state tariffs, the telephone company must be given notification prior to connection.
In some states, prior approval of connection must be obtained from the state Public Utility Commission,
Public Service Commission or state Corporation Commission.

Warning for the Setting of Header and Footer


The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or
other electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly
contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission,
the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending
the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or
individual.
In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the following steps.
(Refer to Chapter 8 and Chapter 9 Advance Operation page 8-39, 8-40, 9-13, 9-15, 9-20, 9-28 and
9-30)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ix
Safety Information

IC CS-03-Telecommunication Devices
NOTICE:
Industry Canada (IC) label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment
meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements. IC does not
guarantee the equipment will operate to the users satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities
of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable
method of connection. In some cases, the companys inside wiring associated with a single line individual
service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The
customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of
service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility
designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment
malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the
equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This
precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION:
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate
electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
NOTICE:
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the
maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an
interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the
Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5. REN=0.4
If you experience trouble with this equipment, please contact:
Minolta Business Equipment (Canada), Ltd.
369 Britannia Road E.
Mississauga, Ontario L42 2H5
Tel: (905)890-6600

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

x
Safety Information

Laser Safety
This is a digital machine which operates by means of a laser. There is no possibility of danger from the
laser, provided the machine is operated according to the instructions in this manual.
Since radiation emitted by the laser is completely confined within protective housing, the laser beam
cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.
This machine is certified as a Class 1 laser product. This means the machine does not produce hazardous
laser radiation.

Internal Laser Radiation


Maximum Average Radiant Power: 19.5 W (Di200f/Di251f) / 27.8 W (Di351f) at the laser aperture of
the print head unit.
Wavelength: 770-795 nm (Di200f/Di251f)
775-795 nm (Di351f)
This product employs a Class 3b laser diode that emits an invisible laser beam.
The laser diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print head unit.
The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICE ITEM.
Therefore, the print head unit should not be opened under any circumstances.

Laser Aperture of
the Print Head Unit

Print Head

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4015O022AB

1166O263AB

This figure shows the view inside the Right Door


with the Imaging Unit removed.

xi
Safety Information

CDRH regulation
This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Standard according to
the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the
United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food
and Drug Administration of the U. S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means
that the device does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
The label shown to page xiii indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to
laser products marketed in the United States.
CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this
manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is 5 mW (Di200f/Di251f) / 15 mW
(Di351f) and the wavelength is 770-795 nm (Di200f/Di251f) / 775-795 nm (Di351f).

Notice for Ni-MH Batteries


Ni-MH (Nickel Metal Hydride) Batteries are installed inside machine as back up memory batteries.
Please dispose according to local, state and federal regulations.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

xii
Safety Information

For European Users


CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is 5 mW (Di200f/Di251f) / 15
mW (Di351f) and the wavelength is 770-795 nm (Di200f/Di251f) / 775-795 nm (Di351f).

For Denmark Users


ADVARSEL
Usynlig laserstrling ved bning, nr sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion. Undg udsttelse for
strling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825 sikkerheds kravene.
Dansk: Dette er en halvlederlaser. Laserdiodens hjeste styrke er 5 mW (Di200f/Di251f) / 15 mW
(Di351f) og blgelngden er 770-795 nm (Di200f/Di251f) / 775-795 nm (Di351f).

For Finland, Sweden Users


LOUKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT

VAROITUS!
Laitteen Kyttminen muulla kuin tss kyttohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa kyttjn
turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittvlle nkymttmlle lasersteilylle.
Tm on puolijohdelaser. Laserdiodin suurin teho on 5 mW (Di200f/Di251f) / 15 mW (Di351f) ja
aallonpituus on 770-795 nm (Di200f/Di251f) / 775-795 nm (Di351f).
VARNING!
Om apparaten anvnds p annat stt n i denna bruksanvisning specificerats, kan anvndaren utsttas
fr osynlig laserstrlning, som verskrider grnsen fr laserklass 1.
Det hr r en halvledarlaser. Den maximala effekten fr laserdioden r 5 mW (Di200f/Di251f) / 15 mW
(Di351f) och vglngden r 770-795 nm (Di200f/Di251f) / 775-795 nm (Di351f).
VARO!
Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina nkymttmlle lasersteilylle. l katso steeseen.
VARNING!
Osynlig laserstrlning nr denna del r ppnad och sprren r urkopplad. Betrakta ej strlen.

For Norway Users


ADVERSEL
Dersom apparatet brukes p annen mte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisning, kan brukeren utsettes
for unsynlig laserstrling som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1.
Dette en halvleder laser. Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 5 mW (Di200f/Di251f) / 15 mW (Di351f) og
blgelengde er 770-795 nm (Di200f/Di251f) / 775-795 nm (Di351f).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

xiii
Safety Information

Laser Safety Label


A laser safety label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.
Manufacturers
Name Plate
Laser safety label

4015O259AA

4015O258EB

The Manufacturers Name Plate is affixed at the position illustrated above.


Please write down the Model Name and Serial No. of your copier here.
Model:
Serial No.

Ozone Release
NOTE
= Locate the Machine in a Well Ventilated Room =
A negligible amount of ozone is generated during normal operation of this machine. An unpleasant
odor may, however, be created in poorly ventilated rooms during extensive machine operations. For a
comfortable, healthy, and safe operating environment, it is recommended that the room well ventilated.

REMARQUE
= Placer lappareil dans une pice largement ventile =
Une quantit d'ozone ngligable est dgage pendant le fonctionnement de lappareil quand celui-ci
est utilis normalement. Cependant, une odeur dsagrable peut tre ressentie dans les pices dont
l'aration est insuffisante et lorsque une utilisation prolonge de lappareil est effectue. Pour avoir la
certitude de travailler dans un environnement runissant des conditions de confort, sant et de
scurit, il est prfrable de bien arer la pice ou se trouve lappareil.

Acoustic Noise
For European Users
Machine Noise Regulation 3 GSGV, 18.01.1991 : The sound pressure level at the operator position
according to EN 27779 is equal to or less than 70dB(A).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

xiv

Terms and Symbols for the Type of Originals and Copy Paper
A few special terms and symbols are used in this manual to designate types of originals and copy paper.
This page explains about these terms and symbols.

Feeding Direction (copy paper path)


In this copier system, copy paper is taken up from the right-hand side of the copier, fed through the copier
toward the left-hand side, and ejected face down onto the Copy Tray. In the figure below, the direction in
which the copy paper is fed, as indicated by the arrow, is called the feeding direction.

4015O019AB

Width and Length


When we talk about the size of the original or copy,
we call side A width and side B length.
A: Width
B: Length
1139O1610A

Terms and Symbols Used


<Lengthwise

>

When the original or copy has a length longer than


its width, we call it lengthwise and use symbol
L or
.
1139O1610A

<Crosswise

>

When the original or copy has a length shorter


than its width, we call it crosswise and use
symbol C or
.
1139O1620A

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Safety Notes

Chapter 1

1-1

Chapter 1
Safety Notes

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-2

Safety Notes

Chapter 1

1. Installing the Copier


Installation Site
To ensure utmost safety and prevent possible malfunctions of the copier, install it in a location which
meets the following requirements.
A place away from a curtain or the like that may catch fire and burn easily.
An area where there is no possibility of being splashed with water or other types of liquid.
An area free from direct sunlight.
A place out of the direct air stream of an air conditioner, heater, or ventilator.
A well-ventilated place.
A dry place.
A dust-free location.
An area not subject to undue vibration.
A stable and level location.
A place where ammonia or other organic gas is not generated.
A place which does not put the operator in the direct stream of exhaust from the copier.
A place which is not near any kind of heating device.

Power Source
The power source voltage requirements are as follows :
Use a power source with little voltage fluctuation.

Voltage Fluctuation
: Within 10% (127V : +6%, 10%)
Frequency Fluctuation : Within 3Hz

Space Requirements
To ensure easy copier operation, supply replacements, and service maintenance, adhere to the
recommended space requirements detailed below. Allow a clearance of 12-1/4 inch or more at the back
of the copier for a ventilation duct and replacement of the toner bottle.
41-3/4

58-1/2

65-3/4

4015O023AD

<With AFR-17, FN-504, PF-118, PF-119 and AD-15 mounted>


Unit: Inch

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-3

The operating environmental requirements of the machine are as follows:


Temperature : 10C to 32C (50F to 90F) with a fluctuation of 10C (18F) per hour.
Humidity
: 15% to 85% with a fluctuation of 10% per hour.

Acoustic noise
<For European Users Only>
Machine Noise Regulation 3 GSGV, 18.01.1991 : The sound pressure level at the operator position
according to EN 27779 is equal to or less than 70dB(A).

Using the Machine Properly


To ensure optimum performance of the machine, follow the precautions listed below.
NEVER place a heavy object on the machine or subject the machine to shocks.
NEVER open any doors, or turn OFF the machine while the machine is making copies.
NEVER bring any magnetized object or use flammable sprays near the machine.
NEVER remodel the machine, as a fire or electrical shock could result.
ALWAYS insert the power plug all the way into the outlet.
ALWAYS make sure that the outlet is visible, clear of the machine or machine cabinet.
ALWAYS provide good ventilation when making a large number of continuous copies.

NOTE
= Locate the Machine in a Well Ventilated Room =
A negligible amount of ozone is generated during normal operation of this machine. An unpleasant
odor may, however, be created in poorly ventilated rooms during extensive machine operations. For a
comfortable, healthy, and safe operating environment, it is recommended that the room well
ventilated.

REMARQUE
= Placer lappareil dans une pice largement ventile =
Une quantit d'ozone ngligable est dgage pendant le fonctionnement de lappareil quand celui-ci
est utilis normalement. Cependant, une odeur dsagrable peut tre ressentie dans les pices dont
l'aration est insuffisante et lorsque une utilisation prolonge de lappareil est effectue. Pour avoir
la certitude de travailler dans un environnement runissant des conditions de confort, sant et de
scurit, il est prfrable de bien arer la pice ou se trouve lappareil.

Moving the Machine


If you need to transport the machine over a long distance, consult your Technical Representative.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Safety Notes

Operating Environment

Chapter 1

2. Precautions for Use

1-4
Chapter 1

2. Precautions for Use

Care of Machine Supplies


Use the following precautions when handling the machine supplies (toner, paper, etc.).

Safety Notes

Store the paper, toner, and other supplies in a place free from direct sunlight and away from any heating

apparatus. Keep them in a dry, cool, clean environment.


Store paper, which has been removed from its wrapper but not loaded into the drawer, in a sealed

plastic bag in a cool, dark place.


Keep supplies out of the reach of children.
If your hands become soiled with toner, wash them with soap and water immediately.

Legal Restrictions on Copying


Certain types of documents must never be copied by the machine for the purpose or with the intent to
pass copies of such documents off as the original. The following is not a complete list but is meant to be
used as a guide to responsible copying.
Financial Instruments
Personal Checks
Travelers Checks
Money Orders
Certificates of Deposit
Bonds or other Certificates of Indebtedness
Stock Certificates
Legal Documents
Food Stamps
Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
Checks or Drafts drawn by Government Agencies
Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
Passports
Immigration Papers
Motor Vehicle Licenses and Titles
House and Property Titles and Deeds
General
Identification Cards, Badges, or Insignias
Copyrighted Works without permission of the copyright owner
In addition, it is prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign currencies or Works of
Art without permission of the copyright owner.
When in doubt about the nature of a document, consult with legal counsel.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 2
Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Chapter 2

2-1

2-2

1. Typical Copies You Can Make with Your Copier


Typical copies you can make with your copier

Single-sided
Orig.

Double-sided
Orig.

Copy

4002O012AA

Single-sided

Orig.

Copy

4002O133AB

Book

Single-sided

Double-sided

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Single-sided

Single-sided

Copyp.3-31

Original

Chapter 2

Heres a sample of the features the machine is equipped with to make different types of copies. For
specific operations, see the relevant pages indicated by p.

Orig.

Copy

Copy

4002O014AA

2-in-1

4002O015AA

4-in-1
Orig.
Orig.
Copy
Copy

4002O017AA

4002O016AA

Booklet
Orig.

Copy

4002O018AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-3
1. Typical Copies You Can Make with Your Copier

Mixed Original Detection p.2-32


Mixed Orig. Detection
Copy

Chapter 2

Orig.

Finishing p.3-18
Sort

Staple
Copy

Orig.

Orig.
Copy

4002O052AA

Group

4002O019AA

Hole Punch

Orig.

Copy

Orig.

Copy

4002O053AA

4002O311EA

Zoom Ratio p.3-12


Reduce, Full size, Enlarge, X/Y Zoom
Copy
Orig.

4002O022AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

4002O029AA

2-4
1. Typical Copies You Can Make with Your Copier

Auxiliary Functions
Cover p.3-44
Copy

Orig.

Copy

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Chapter 2

Orig.

Page Insertion p.3-46

4002O023AA

OHP Interleaving p.3-50


Orig.

4002O024AA

File Margin p.3-54


Copy
Orig.

Copy

4002O070AA

4002O025AA

Erase p.3-56
Orig.

Image Repeat p.3-58


Copy

Orig.
Copy

4002O071AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4002O072AA

2-5
1. Typical Copies You Can Make with Your Copier

Distributionp.3-60
Copy

Orig.

Copy

Chapter 2

Orig.

Separate Scanp.3-61

4002O049AB

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

4002O075AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-6

2. System Overview
System Overview

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Chapter 2

The following overview presents the machine and the available options along with a brief explanation of
the function of each. Refer to Control Panel Keys and Indicators (p.2-19) for use of the Touch Panel
and control panel.

Di200f/Di251f/Di351f and Options


<Di200f>

<Di251f/Di351f>

4015O025AB

4015O026AB

<Di200f>
Original Cover Kit OC-3 <Option>
Holds the original in position on the Original
Glass.

Duplexing Document Feeder AFR-17


<Option>
Automatically feeds originals one page after
another for scanning. It is also capable of
automatically turning over 2-sided originals for
scanning data on both sides.

1166O007AA

1166O014AA

Automatic Document Feeder AF-9 <Option>


Performs automatic feeding of multiple
originals.
1166O008AA

Shift Tray OT-102 <Option>


Permits sorting or grouping of copies.

1166O011AA

Job Tray JS-201 <Option>


Performs sorting and grouping of copies. You
can select the bins for output according to the
application in Users Choice.
1166O012AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-7
2. System Overview

4015O028AB

4015O027AA

Paper Feed Unit PF-118 <Option>


Holds up to 500 sheets of paper and easily
adjusts to different paper sizes.

Paper Feed Unit PF-119 <Option>


Holds up to 500 sheets of paper.
4015O027AA

Copy Table <Option>


Adjusts the height of the machine.
1166O190AA

Copy Desk <Option>


Adjusts the height of the machine.

1166O191AB

8MB Memory, 16MB Memory,


32MB Memory <Option>
To expand the memory capacity of the machine.

Printer Controller Pi3502 <Option>


When installed on the machine, enables the
machine to perform printing functions.
Network Application kit-2 <Option>
Allows the Di200f to send mail and also be used
as a printer.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Chapter 2

Duplex Unit AD-15 <Option>


Automatically turns over 1-sided copies to print
data on both sides.

2-8

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Chapter 2

2. System Overview

<Di251f>
Original Cover Kit OC-3 <Option>
Holds the original in position on the Original
Glass.
Duplexing Document Feeder AFR-17
<Option>
Automatically feeds originals one page after
another for scanning. It is also capable of
automatically turning over 2-sided originals for
scanning data on both sides.
Automatic Document Feeder AF-9 <Option>
Performs automatic feeding of multiple
originals.

1166O007AA

1166O014AA

1166O008AA

Finisher FN-109 <Option>


Permits sorting, grouping, punching or sortstapling of copies.
4002O099AA

Finisher FN-110 <Option>


Permits sorting, grouping or sort-stapling of
copies.
4002O099AA

Option Tray JS-100 <Option>


Mounted on a Finisher FN-109 or Finisher FN110 when the machine is equipped with a Printer
Controller; serves as exit tray for exclusive use
of printer.

4015O218AA

Mailbin Finisher FN-504 <Option>


In addition to the functions of the Finisher, it can
sort or group output into 5 bins. Bin assignment
is available from the PC.
4002O102AA

Shift Tray OT-102 <Option>


Permits sorting or grouping of copies.
1166O011AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-9

1166O012AA

Duplex Unit AD-15 <Option>


Automatically turns over 1-sided copies to print
data on both sides.
4015O028AB

Paper Feed Unit PF-119 <Option>


Holds up to 500 sheets of paper.
4015O027AA

Paper Feed Unit PF-118 <Option>


Holds up to 500 sheets of paper and easily
adjusts to different paper sizes.
4015O027AA

Copy Table <Option>


Adjusts the height of the machine.
1166O190AA

Copy Desk <Option>


Adjusts the height of the machine.

1166O191AB

Large Capacity Cabinet PF-117


<Option>
Holds up to 2,500 sheets of paper.
4015O029AA

8MB Memory, 16MB Memory,


32MB Memory <Option>
To expand the memory capacity of the machine.
Printer Controller Pi3502 <Option>
When installed on the machine, enables the
machine to perform printing functions.
Network Application kit-2 <Option>
Allows the Di251f to send mail and also be used
as a printer.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Job Tray JS-201 <Option>


Performs sorting and grouping of copies. You
can select the bins for output according to the
applications in Users Choice.

Chapter 2

2. System Overview

2-10
2. System Overview

<Di351f>

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Chapter 2

Original Cover Kit OC-3 <Option>


Holds the original in position on the Original
Glass.

1166O007AA

Duplexing Document Feeder AFR-17


<Option>
Automatically feeds originals one page after
another for scanning. It is also capable of
automatically turning over 2-sided originals for
scanning data on both sides.

1166O014AA

Automatic Document Feeder AF-9 <Option>


Performs automatic feeding of multiple
originals.

1166O008AA

Finisher FN-109 <Option>


Permits sorting, grouping, punching or sortstapling of copies.
4002O099AA

Finisher FN-110 <Option>


Permits sorting, grouping or sort-stapling of
copies.
4002O099AA

Option Tray JS-100 <Option>


Mounted on a Finisher FN-109 or Finisher FN110 when the machine is equipped with a Printer
Controller; serves as exit tray for exclusive use
of printer.

4015O218AA

Mailbin Finisher FN-504 <Option>


In addition to the functions of the Finisher, it can
sort or group output into 5 bins. Bin assignment
is available from the PC.
4002O102AA

Shift Tray OT-102 <Option>


Permits sorting or grouping copies.

1166O011AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-11

1166O012AA

Duplex Unit AD-15 <Standard Equipment>


Automatically turns over 1-sided copies to print
data on both sides.
4015O028AB

Paper Feed Unit PF-119 <Option>


Holds up to 500 sheets of paper.
4015O027AA

4015O027AA

Paper Feed Unit PF-118 <Option>


Holds up to 500 sheets of paper and easily
adjusts to different paper sizes.

Copy Table <Option>


Adjusts the height of the machine.
1166O190AA

Copy Desk <Option>


Adjusts the height of the machine.

1166O191AB

Large Capacity Cabinet PF-117


<Option>
Holds up to 2,500 sheets of paper.
4015O029AA

8MB Memory, 16MB Memory,


32MB Memory <Option>
To expand the memory capacity of the machine.
Printer Controller Pi3502 <Option>
When installed on the machine, enables the
machine to perform printing functions.
Network Application kit-2 <Option>
Allows the Di351f to send mail and also be used
as a printer.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Job Tray JS-201 <Option>


Performs sorting and grouping of copies. You
can select the bins for output according to the
applications in Users Choice.

Chapter 2

2. System Overview

2-12
2. System Overview

Option

6 7 8

9 10

11

Chapter 2

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

4015O030AB

4015O031AB

12

13
14

15
16
17

4015O032AB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-13
2. System Overview

Document Exit Tray


Misfeed Clearing Guide
Document Feed Tray
Document Guide Plate
Single Feed Tray

:
:
:
:
:

Receives originals which have been scanned by the machine.


Open when clearing an original that has been misfed.p.10-22
Load the originals to be scanned face up on this tray.
Slide the guide plate to the size of the originals.
Insert a single sheet into this tray to make a copy or copies of it.

Automatic Document Feeder AF-9


6 Print Lamp
7
8
9
10
11

Misfeed Clearing Guide


Document Guide Plate
Feed Tray Extender
Document Exit Tray
Document Stopper

: Lights green while the original is being scanned. Lights orange when a
trouble occurs.
: Open when clearing an original that has been misfed.p.10-23
: Slide the guide plate to the size of the originals.
: Slide this extender out when placing originals of large size.
: Receives originals which have been scanned by the machine.
: Slide this stopper out whenever originals of a large size have been
loaded.

Original Cover OC-3


12 Original Pad

: Holds the original placed on the Original Glass in position.

Duplex Unit AD-15


13 Lock Release Lever
14 Duplex Unit

: Used to open the Duplex Unit to clear a misfed sheet of paper.


p.10-21
: Automatically turns over 1-sided copies to print data on both sides.

Paper Feed Unit PF-118/Paper Feed Unit PF-119


15 Drawer

16 Drawer

: Holds up to 500 sheets of paper.p.10-5


* The drawer lamp starts blinking when paper in the drawer is low and
lights orange steadily as soon as it runs out.
: Holds up to 500 sheets of paper and easily adjusts to different paper
sizes.p.10-6
* The drawer lamp starts blinking when paper in the drawer is low and
lights orange steadily as soon as it runs out.

Large Capacity Cabinet PF-117


17 Drawer

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

: Holds up to 2,500 sheets of paper.p.10-7

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

1
2
3
4
5

Chapter 2

Duplexing Document Feeder AFR-17

2-14
2. System Overview

Chapter 2

24
23
22

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

21
20
19
18

4015O032AB

28

31

29

27
30
26
4015O033AA

25

32

4002O116AA

4015O034AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-15
2. System Overview

19
20
21
22
23
24

Front Door
Bottom Offset Tray
Top Offset Tray
Option Offset Tray
Option Tray Cover
Upper Cover

: Hold to slide the Finisher away from the machine to clear a misfed
sheet of paper or perform other service job.p.10-24
: Open to clear a misfed sheet of paper.
: Receives sorted paper by shifting.
: Receives plain paper or Card.
: Receives the type of paper assigned by the PC.
: Open to clear a misfed sheet of paper.p.10-24
: Open to clear a misfed sheet of paper.p.10-24

Mailbin Finisher FN-504


25
26
27
28
29
30

Mail Bins
Bottom Offset Tray
Top Offset Tray
Top Offset Tray Cover
Stapler Cover
Grip

:
:
:
:
:
:

Receive copied paper.


Receives sorted paper by shifting.
Receives plain paper or Card.
Open to clear a misfed sheet of paper.p.10-30
Open to replace the staple cartridge.
Hold to slide the Finisher away from the machine to clear a misfed
sheet of paper or perform other service job.p.10-30

<Precautions When Using a Finisher>


NEVER place an object under the Bottom Offset
Tray. Anything that is placed under the Bottom
Offset Tray can interfere with the tray when it is
lowered after a copy has been fed onto it, which
could result in a malfunction.
Do not place an
object here.
4002O276AA

Shift Tray OT-102


31 Shift Tray

: Receives copy sets sorted by bin shifting.

Job Tray JS-201


32 Job Tray

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

: Can receive a maximum of 100 finished copies.

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

18 Grip

Chapter 2

Finisher FN-109/Finisher FN-110

2-16
2. System Overview

Chapter 2

A view from the Outside

6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

1
2
3
4
5

13

4015O225AA

: Set the various functions of the machine. p.2-19


: A page or pages of a document received through the fax or copies
made are fed out into this tray.
Power Switch
: Open the cover, and you will find the Power Switch to turn ON and
OFF the machine. p.2-25
1st Drawer
: Holds up to 250 sheets of paper and easily adjusts to different paper
(Multi Purpose Cassette)
sizes.p.10-2
* The drawer lamp starts blinking when paper in the drawer is low
and lights orange steadily as soon as it runs out.
2nd Drawer
: Holds up to 500 sheets of paper. p.10-5
* The drawer lamp starts blinking when paper in the drawer is low
and lights orange steadily as soon as it runs out.
* Standard on Di251f/Di351f.
Original Glass
: Place your original face down on this glass. p.2-30
Display Contrast Control Knob : Use to adjust the brightness of the Touch Panel.
Total Counter
: Shows the total number of printed pages produced so far.
Upper Right Door
: Open to clear a misfed sheet of paper.p.10-19
Right Door
: Open to replace the Imaging Unit or clear a misfed sheet of paper.
p.10-19
Lock Release Lever [R1]
: Use to unlock the Right Door to replace the Imaging Unit or clear a
misfed sheet of paper.p.10-19
Manual Bypass Tray
: Use for manual feeding of single sheets of paper into the
machine.p.3-7
Side Panel
: Open to clear a misfed sheet of paper. p.10-19

1 Control Panel
2 Non-Sort Tray
3
4

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-17
2. System Overview

1
2

4015O036AB

1 Lock Release Lever [R2]


2 Green Hooks

: Pull up to clear a misfed sheet of paper.p.10-19


: Pull to slide out the Imaging Unit.p.10-19

<Precaution for Opening/Closing the Right Door>


When opening or closing the Right Door, be
careful not to touch the Image Transfer
Roller: A malfunction could result.
Image Transfer Roller

4015O024AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Chapter 2

Inside the Machine

2-18
2. System Overview

Fax Options: Identification and Functions

TX Marker STAMP UNIT:


Uses stamp to show user that a document has been scanned.
Can be mounted only on the Automatic Document Feeder.

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Chapter 2

G3 MULTIPORT SERIES 2:
Accommodates a number of lines to permit independent operation of each.

4015O226AA

2
3
4

5
6
6
7
4015O248EC

*1
*2
*3
*4

4015O250CA

Socket for LAN Cable <Option>


For details, see the Operators Manual for the
Network Interface Card.
Connector for an Extra Telephone Set
Port 1 Line Connector (for subscriber line)
Parallel Port <Option>
For details, see the Operators Manual for the
Printer Driver.
Used when a Printer Controller is mounted
(option).
Port 2 Line Connector (for subscriber line)
Socket for LAN Cable <Option>
For details, see Network Application
Operators Manual.
Used when a Printer Controller is mounted
(option).

[4], [5], and [8] are used only when a Printer Controller is mounted.
[1] is used only when a Network Interface Card is mounted.
[6] is used only when a G3 MULTIPORT SERIES 2 is mounted.
[7] is used only when a Network Application kit-2 is mounted.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-19

3. Control Panel Keys and Touch Panel


Control Panel Keys and Indicators
3

7
8
9
10
4015O261EA

14
1 Touch Panel
Use to make settings for, and programming of,
various copying functions.p.2-20
2 Utility Key
Press to show the Utility Mode menu.p.7-2
3 Mode Check Key
Lists the current settings on the screen.
From this screen you can access the setting
screen of a particular function and change or
cancel the setting as necessary.p.2-33
Access to register the current settings in a
program.p.7-12
4 Pause Key
Useful to provide dial waiting periods, such as
when accessing public lines from an extension
line or receiving information services.
5 Copy Key
Press to select the Copy mode.
6 Fax/Scan Key
Press to select the Fax mode or Scanner mode.
For details of Scanner mode, see the operators
manual for the Scanner.
7 Extra Scan
Press to select the Scanner mode.
For details, see the operators manual for the
Network Application.

13

12

11

8 Access Mode Key


Press to enter the access number. p.2-35
This key becomes valid only when Copy Track
of the Administrator mode available from Users
Choice is set.
9 Interrupt Key
Press to interrupt a current job with a different
one.
Press again to return to the previous job.
p.2-33
Lights to indicate that the machine is in the
Interrupt mode.
10 Panel Reset Key
Press to initialize all settings.p.2-33
11 Clear Key
Press to:
Reset the multi-copy entry to 1.
Clear the settings entered from the 10-Key Pad
and other numeric values previously
programmed.
12 Stop Key
Press to:
Stop a print cycle.
Stop a scanning cycle.
13 10-Key Pad
Use to set the various numeric values, including
the number of copies to be made.
14 Start Key
Press to start a scanning or print cycle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 2

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

2-20
3. Control Panel Keys and Touch Panel

Chapter 2

What is the Touch Panel?


The Touch Panel is the screen on which you can make settings for, and program, the various copying
functions offered by the machine. When you turn ON the Power Switch, the Basic screen as shown below
appears on the Touch Panel.
Note that some of the Touch Panel screens used in the Operators Manual may be different from what you
actually see on your machine.

Operating the Touch Panel

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

You need only to lightly touch the key shown on the Touch Panel to select or activate the function
represented by the key.
NOTE
NEVER press the Touch Panel with force or use a hard or pointed object to press it, as a damaged panel
could result.

How the Basic Screen is Organized


Copier screen: For using the copying functions
1 Supplementary Function Keys
2 Message Display
3 Function Display

4 Set Function
5 Sub-message Display
4016P184CA

Auto-mode Screen:
Used for both facsimiles and copying without
specifying which function is to be used.

4017P345EA

FAX Screen:
Used to select various facsimile functions.

4016P251CA

Useful Tips
When the optional Network Application kit-2 is mounted, the Scanner screen can be displayed for
using the various Scanner functions.
Users Choice allows you to select the Copier, FAX, or Auto-mode Screen as default according to your
particular needs. p.8-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-21
3. Control Panel Keys and Touch Panel

* Touching Basics returns you to the Basic screen.

ex.) Auxiliary Function


2 Message Display

4016P068CA

Shows the current machine status, operating


instructions and precautions, and other data,
including the number of copies selected.

ex.) Add paper


3 Function Display

4017P161EA

Shows the basic function keys that can be selected


to set the corresponding basic function.
Touching a basic function key shows the
corresponding basic function screen.
* What is shown inside the key is the current
setting.

ex.) Zoom Ratio


4 Set Function

4017P015EA

Shows graphic representations of the current


settings.
* To check for more details of the set functions,
press the Mode Check key.p.2-33

4016P060CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Double-Sided

Copy: Single-Sided

ex.) Orig.

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Shows the different supplementary function keys


that can be selected to set the corresponding
supplementary function.
When any of these keys is touched, the
corresponding supplementary function screen
appears.

Chapter 2

1 Supplementary Function Keys

2-22
3. Control Panel Keys and Touch Panel

5 Sub-message Display

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Chapter 2

Shows icons that represent various data on the job


being run, such as: the amount of memory space
still available for use, toner-empty condition, and
paper-empty condition.
* To check for the settings of the currently reserved
job, touch [Activity List]. p.2-36

ex.) Now copying.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4016P134CA

2-23

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Chapter 2

3. Control Panel Keys and Touch Panel

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-24
3. Control Panel Keys and Touch Panel

Icons

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Chapter 2

Icon

Explanation

Dialing

Now dialing.

Dial Wait

Waiting to re-dial.

Copying

Now copying.

Scanning

Now scanning a facsimile document.

Receiving

Now receiving a facsimile.

Sending

Now sending a facsimile.

Polling TX Wait

A document is waiting for polling transmission.

Document on Bulletin Board

A document that has been registered on the Bulletin


Board.

Printing

Now printing.

Print Waiting

Processing the next print job.

Data being received

Receiving data for PC print.

Data remains

PC print data left in memory.

Automatic Reception OFF

Manual reception is set.

Paper empty

Add paper. p.10-2

Lack of Toner

Toner is low. Replace the Toner Bottle. p.10-10

Replace I/U

Need to change the Imaging Unit. Call your Tech.


Rep.

Maintenance Call

Machine needs service. Call your Tech. Rep.

Document Received

A document received in the mailbox.

Access Mode

An account has been selected with the Access Mode


key with [100 Accounts 2] set for the Copy Track
function.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-25

4. Turning ON and OFF and Initial Mode

Turning the Machine OFF:


Open the cover and press the Power Switch to
the
(OFF) position.

4015O229AA

When Machine is Turned ON


When the Power Switch is turned ON, the Start key lights orange.
In a few seconds, the message Now warming-up. Ready to scan. appears and the Start key lights green.
The machine thereafter enables its auto copy start function. p.2-33
At this time, however, pressing the Start key will not start a copy cycle. The Di200f/Di251f machine
needs a warm-up period of about 60 seconds (at room temperature of 23C), and Di351f needs a warm-up
period of about 70 seconds (at room temperature of 23C).

Initial Mode
When the Power Switch is turned ON, the Basic screen appears on the Touch Panel. The settings on this
screen are called the initial mode, serving as the reference for all panel settings to be made later.

4016P067CA

Useful Tip
Users Choice can be used to change any of the settings of initial mode. p.8-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

No. of copies selected: 1


Finishing
: Non-Sort
Zoom
: Full size (1.000)
Paper
: Auto Paper
Density
: Auto Exposure (Text mode)
Orig. Copy : Single-Sided Single-Sided

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Turning the Machine ON:


Open the cover and press the Power Switch to
the (ON) position.

Chapter 2

Turning ON and OFF

2-26

5. Placing the Original

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Chapter 2

Using the Document Feeder


The document feeder automatically feeds original sheets placed on the Document Feed Tray, one by one,
to let the machine scan the data on each original. After the machine completes scanning the data, the
document feeder automatically ejects it onto the Document Exit Tray. To ensure the best performance and
most effective use of the document feeder, use the appropriate type of originals as detailed below.
Use of unsuitable types of originals could result in an original misfeed or a damaged original.

Originals Suitable for the Document Feeder


<Duplexing Document Feeder>
Types of Originals: Sheets (Plain paper)
1-sided Original (weighing 13-1/4 lb to 29-1/4 lb)
2-sided Original (weighing 16 lb to 24 lb)
Mixed Original Detection mode (weighing 16 lb to 24 lb)
Original Size:1-Sided Original, 2-Sided Original mode
: 1117 L to 5-1/28-1/2 L
Mixed Original Detection mode
: 1117 L to Letter
<Automatic Document Feeder>
Types of Originals: Sheets (Plain paper)
Single feeding: Paper weight 10-3/4 lb to 21-3/4 lb
Multiple feeding: Paper weight 14 lb to 21-3/4 lb
Original Size: 1-Sided Original, 2-Sided Original mode
1117 L to 5-1/28-1/2
Mixed Original Detection mode
1117 L to 5-1/28-1/2 C

Unsuitable Originals
Typing paper, paraffin paper, and other thin paper
Card
Originals greater than 1117 L or smaller than 5-1/28-1/2
Transparencies, translucent paper
Wrinkled, dog-eared, curled, or torn originals
Clipped or stapled originals
Carbon-backed originals
* For any of these types of originals, raise the document feeder and place the original on the glass to let
the machine scan it. p.2-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-27
5. Placing the Original

Loading the Originals in Document Feeder

Slide the Document Guide Plate to the size of


the originals.
Feed Tray Extender
4015O045AB

Document Stopper
4015O043AA

Useful Tip
Slide the Feed Tray Extender and Document
Stopper out when loading originals of a size
larger than Letter.

Neatly load stack of originals face up on the


Document Feed Tray.

4015O046AB

If you need to load your original in a direction


different from these examples, set Original
Direction on the Touch Panel. p.3-35
To send a facsimile, load the original in the
Automatic Document Feeder so that its longer
side is placed against the Document Guide
Plate. If the original is loaded with its shorter
side against the Document Guide Plate, the
receiving party may receive it in a reduced size.

4015O044AB

NOTES
The maximum number of originals that can be
loaded is 70.
Make sure that the top level of the original
stack does not exceed the marking.
Make sure that the Document Guide Plate is
touching the edges of the original stack. If its
not pressed snugly against the original stack,
skewed feeding could result.
You can make copies automatically from
originals of assorted sizes loaded in the
Automatic Document Feeder. p.2-32

Press the Start key. The originals will be fed


into the Automatic Document Feeder,
starting with the top page.

NOTES
The machine can send by facsimile the image of
the original of a nonstandard size as long as it
falls within the following sizes.

Minimum
4015O266EA

Maximum

The machine may fail to read the areas of 1/2


inch margins on top, bottom, right, and left
edges of the original if it is to be sent by
facsimile.

NOTES
When loading the original in the Automatic
Document Feeder, load it in the direction as
shown in the illustration.
4015O267EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Chapter 2

Automatic Document Feeder

2-28
5. Placing the Original

Duplexing Document Feeder


Slide the Document Guide Plate to the size of
the originals.

Chapter 2

NOTES
When loading the original in the Duplexing
Document Feeder, load it in the direction shown
below.

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

P
1166O021AA

Neatly load stack of originals face up on the


Document Feed Tray.

4015O041AB

P
4015O042AB

4015O244AA

NOTES
The maximum number of originals that can be
loaded is 50.
The machine can scan a document consisting of
50 or more pages at one time.p.3-61
Make sure that the top level of the original
stack does not exceed the marking.
Make sure that the Document Guide Plate is
touching the edges of the original stack. If it's
not pressed snugly against the original stack,
skewed feeding could result.
You can make copies automatically from
originals of assorted sizes loaded in the
Duplexing Document Feeder.p.2-32

If you need to load your original in a direction


different from these examples, set Original
Direction on the Touch Panel. p.3-35
To send a facsimile, load the original in the
Duplexing Document Feeder so that its longer
side is placed against the Document Guide
Plate. If the original is loaded with its shorter
side against the Document Guide Plate, the
receiving party may receive it in a reduced size.

Press the Start key. The originals will be fed


into the Duplexing Document Feeder,
starting with the top page.

NOTE
The machine may fail to read the areas of 1/2
inch margins on top, bottom, right, and left edges
of the original if it is to be sent by facsimile.

4015O267EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-29
5. Placing the Original

Open the Single Feed Tray and slide the


Guide Plate to the size of the original.

1166O025AA

Make sure that the Start key is lit green. Then


insert the original face down into the Single
Feed Tray.

1166O026AB

NOTES
Be sure to place only one original at a time.
Be sure to correct any fold or curl in the
original beforehand.

The original is automatically taken up and


the copy cycle starts.

Making sure that the Start key lights green


again, insert the next original.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

NOTES
Originals appropriate for the SADF Mode.
Type: Plain paper
Weight: 9-1/4 lb to 53-1/4 lb
Size: 1117 L to 5-1/28-1/2
The following features will be canceled when using the SADF mode:
2-sided Original, 2-in-1 Original, Book, Sort, Group, Staple, Cover, Page Insertion, Number
Stamping, manual feeding, Original Direction, and Margin.

Chapter 2

<Using the SADF Mode>


In this mode, you insert your originals one by one into the document feeder to make a copy or copies.
When you insert the original, the machine automatically starts the copy cycle.

2-30
5. Placing the Original

Placing the Original on the Glass

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Chapter 2

Different methods are used to place the original depending on its type. Use the procedure appropriate for
your original. If you are using a document feeder, see p.2-26.
NOTES
If you place your original directly on the Original Glass, place it in the direction illustrated below.

4015O047AB

4015O048AB

If you need to place your original in a direction different from these examples, set Original
Direction on the Touch Panel.p.3-35
The machine may fail to read the areas of 1/2 inch margins on top, bottom, right, and left edges of the
original if it is to be sent by facsimile.

4015O267EA

Sheet Originals
<Using plain paper or types of originals not
suitable for the document feeder>

Position the original in the right rear corner


with the marker on the scale.
Original Scales

Raise the Original Cover (document feeder)


and place the original face down on the
Original Glass.

1166O192AA

3
1166O027AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Gently lower the Original Cover.

NOTE
To send a facsimile, place the original so that its
shorter side is placed against the Original Width
Scale on the right. If the original is placed with
its longer side against the Original Width Scale,
the receiving party may receive it in a reduced
size.

2-31
5. Placing the Original

<When placing an open book or magazine>

Place the original in the same way as the


sheet originals.

Place a blank sheet of paper of the same size


over the original.

Place the open book so that its top edge is at


the rear of the machine and the center of the
book is aligned with the Book Marker
indicated on the Original Length Scale.

Blank
Sheet of
Paper

4015O049AB

Original Length Scale

Book Marker

1166O028AA

Gently lower the Original Cover (document


feeder).

1166O186AA

Gently lower the Original Cover.

NOTES
If the original is thick, scan the data with the
Original Cover raised.
Do not look directly at the Original Glass
surface during a scanning sequence, since a
strong beam of light is emitted.
Not positioning the open book properly will
result in copies with pages in incorrect order.
Be sure to raise the Original Cover 15 or more
before placing the original. If the Original
Cover is raised to an angle less than 15, the
machine may fail to select the correct paper
size or zoom ratio.
15

1166O187AA

Do not place an original weighing more than 61/2 lb on the Original Glass.
When placing an open book, do not press the
book hard on the Original Glass, as trouble
could result.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 2

Making Copies from a Book Using


Book Copy Mode

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Highly Transparent Originals


<Using transparencies and translucent paper for
the original>

2-32
5. Placing the Original

Mixed Orig. Detection


The Mixed Original Detection function enables the machine to make copies automatically from originals
of assorted sizes loaded in the document feeder.
Chapter 2

Orig.

Copy

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Auto Paper

Auto Size
When Letter is set for Paper

4002O296EB

NOTE
The machine may not be able to staple copies of different sizes made with Mixed Orig. Detection and
Auto Paper selected.

Load the stack of originals so that the rear


edge of each original is pressed against the
rear Document Guide Plate. Then, slide the
front Document Guide Plate against the front
edges of the originals with the greatest width.
<Duplexing Document Feeder>

NOTE
The maximum number of originals that can be
loaded is 50 sheets.

Touch [Mixed Orig. Detection].

4015O147AA

NOTE
The maximum number of originals that can be
loaded is 50 sheets.
<Automatic Document Feeder>

1166O188AB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4016P185CA

Useful Tip
Users Choice allows you to default to Mixed
Original Detection. p.8-3

2-33

6. Auxiliary Functions

Mode Check
By pressing the Mode Check key on the control
panel, you can check or change or store the current
settings.
<Copy Mode>

Useful Tips
The Panel Reset key enables you to cancel all
previous settings with one touch of the key.
To avoid miscopy, be sure to press this key
before making any setting for your own copy
job.

Auto Copy Start


If you load originals into the document feeder or
place an original on the glass and press the Start
key while the machine is warming up after it has
been turned ON, the Auto Copy Start function
allows that copy process to start as soon as the
machine completes warm up.

Interrupt
Use this function to interrupt a current job and run
a different one for urgent need. Pressing the
Interrupt key will stop the current operation,
allowing you to copy a different document or send
it by facsimile.
Pressing the key a second time will let the machine
leave the Interrupt mode, returning to the previous
operation.

4016P186CA

When you touch [Exit] after having checked the


currently set functions, the Basic screen
reappears.
To change a particular function, touch the
corresponding key and then make the necessary
change.
To register the current settings, touch the [Job
Mem Input] key. The Program register screen
will then appear.p.7-12
<Facsimile Mode>

NOTES
To cancel an Interrupt cycle, press the Interrupt
key.
The Panel Reset key does not cancel the
Interrupt mode.
4016P486CA

Useful Tips
Pressing the Interrupt key sets the machine into
the initial mode, except for the finishing
function which is Non-Sort.
Custom Zoom and X/Y Zoom cannot be set in
the Interrupt mode. Cover, Page Insertion and
OHP Interleaving cannot be set in the Interrupt
mode, either.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

When you touch [Enter] after having checked the


currently set functions, the Basic screen
reappears.
To change a particular function, touch the
corresponding key and then make the necessary
change.
It is also possible to add or delete a receiving
party, and to check for details of the settings
made.

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Panel Resetting
The Panel Reset key resets all control panel
settings to default settings, including the number
of copies and zoom ratio. The settings just made
would also be cleared.

Chapter 2

Auxiliary Functions

2-34

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Chapter 2

6. Auxiliary Functions

Auto Panel Reset

Sleep

If no key on the control panel is pressed within 1


min after a copy cycle has been completed or
copying settings made, the Auto Panel Reset
function is activated to return the machine to the
default settings.

To save electricity, the machine automatically


enters the Sleep mode a given period of time after
the last activity. Sleep saves more electricity, but
takes longer to be activated, than Energy Save.
The initial setting is as follows:
30 min for Di200f
60 min for Di251f/Di351f
To cancel the Sleep mode, press any key on the
control panel, raise the Original Cover, or place an
original in the document feeder.

Useful Tip
The time for the machine to activate Auto Panel
Reset Function can be selected. The Auto Panel
Reset function can even be disabled. For details,
see Users Choice. p.8-4

Energy Save Mode


To save electricty, the machine enters the Energy
Save Mode a given period of time after the last
activity.
The initial setting is 15 min.
To cancel the Energy Save Mode, press any key on
the control panel or raise the Original Cover or
place an original on the document feeder.
Useful Tip
The time for the machine to enter the Energy
Save Mode can be selected from 1 min to 240
min. For details, see Users Choice.p.8-4

Useful Tip
The time for the machine to enter the Sleep mode
can be selected from 15 min to 240 min. Sleep
can even be disabled. For details, see Users
Choice.p.8-4

LCD Back-light Off


To save electricity, the machine enters the LCD
Back-light OFF function a given period of time
after the last activity.
The initial setting is 1 min.
To cancel the LCD Back-light OFF function, press
any key on the control panel or raise the Original
Cover or place an original on the document feeder.
Useful Tip
The time for the machine to enter the LCD Backlight OFF function can be selected from 1 min to
240 min. For details, see Users Choice.
p.8-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-35
6. Auxiliary Functions

When the access mode screen changes to the


initial screen, you can start the desired
operation.

When the copy cycle is complete, press the


Access key again.

Alarm Screen

A screen as shown below appears when a


paper misfeed or other malfunction occurs in
the Fax mode.

Touching [Close] will close the alarm screen,


allowing you to perform functions that are
not concerned with the malfunctioning spot.

4016P492CA

Before you can use this function, you must first


turn ON the Copy Track function of the
Administrator Mode available from Utility
Mode. p.9-6
<Entering the Access Code>
From the 10-Key Pad, enter the 4-digit
access code or 3-digit access number, and
press the Access Mode key.

4016P179CB

1134P438DA

4016P489CA

Useful Tip
Touching [Alarm] will allow you to confirm the
specific malfunctioning spot.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

NOTES
If an access number has been programmed, a
copy can be made or a facsimile can be sent
only after the access number (100 Accounts) or
the account number (1000 Accounts) has been
input to the machine.
<Access Code Prompt Screen>

NOTES
If 100 Accounts is set, touch the desired
account key or touch the account number key
and then enter the 4-digit account number
before entering the access code.
To correct the 4-digit access code entered, press
the Clear key, then enter the new number.

Chapter 2

Access Code/Access Number


If an access number has been programmed, it
allows only designated persons to use the machine,
or a supervisor to keep track of the number of
copies made and the number of documents sent by
facsimile by a particular account.

2-36
6. Auxiliary Functions

One-Touch Dialing
Frequently called numbers can be programmed for
one-touch dialing, which allows you to specify the
destination number by simply touching the
corresponding one-touch key.
Using One-Touch Dialing for Transmission.
p.5-6

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Chapter 2

Auto-Mode Screen
This screen can be used for both facsimile and
copying without specifying which function is to be
used.

Activity List

4017P345EA

The machine determines the copying or facsimile


function by the number of digits entered from the
10-Key Pad.
Di200f/Di251f:
If the number entered is 2 digits or less,
the machine considers that it is the
number of copies to be made and starts a
copy cycle.
If the number entered is 3 digits or more,
the machine considers that it is a fax
number and sends the document by
facsimile.
Di351f:
If the number entered is 3 digits or less,
the machine considers that it is the
number of copies to be made and starts a
copy cycle.
If the number entered is 4 digits or more,
the machine considers that it is a fax
number and sends the document by
facsimile.
The Function Display shows the copying program
key [1] and facsimile one-touch keys [1] to [4],
allowing you to directly set the facsimile or
copying function.
Pressing the Copy key or Fax/Scan key on the
control panel will allow you to select the
corresponding screen, either Copy or Fax.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The Activity List is available on the screen,


allowing you to check the results and status of the
documents that are reserved for transmission,
being transmitted, and that have been transmitted,
as well as the documents received. Activity List
p.5-24

2-37
6. Auxiliary Functions

Quitting an Operation

Press the Stop key while a document is being


scanned or printed.

4015O262CA

Touch the operation key of your choice.

4016P188CB

Useful Tip
Touching [Cancel] will cancel the quitting
operation.

Touch [Enter].

Useful Tip
Pressing the Start key will resume the operation
which has been suspended.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Chapter 2

Pressing the Stop key will interrupt the current


operation, including scanning and printing.

2-38

Getting to Know Your Copier/Fax

Chapter 2

6. Auxiliary Functions

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 3

Chapter 3

3-1

Making Copies

Making Copies

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-2

1. Basic Copying Overview


Basic Copying Overview
The most basic copying job is to make full-size (1.000) copies of the original.
Press the Copy key (step 1), place the original in position (step 2), set the number of copies to be made
(step 9), and press the Start key (step 10). This will allow you to make full-size copies of the same size as
the original.
(*Automatically selected in the initial mode are Auto Paper, Full Size, and Auto Exposure.)

Making Copies

Chapter 3

The selections
you make on the Touch Panel will change the exposure level, zoom ratio, the type
of copy and so on.
1. Press the Copy key to show the Copy screen.

4015O219CA

2. Placing the Original.


Load the originals in the document
feeder. p.2-27

4016P067CA

Raise the Original Cover and place the original


face down on the Original Glass.p.2-30

4015O244AA
1166O027AA

Selecting the basic functions.


Changing the paper size
Changing the Zoom Ratio
Sorting copies
Stapling copies
Punching holes in copies

3. Touch [Paper].
p.3-4
4. Touch [Zoom].
p.3-12
5. Touch [Finishing].
p.3-18
4017P015EA

Copy Type.

Selecting the Original

Copy].p.3-31

6. Touch [Orig.
Making copies from a book
Saving paper to make copies

4016P109CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-3
1. Basic Copying Overview

Selecting the exposure level.


7.Touch [Density].
p.3-42
Changing the exposure level

4016P110CA

Selecting the auxiliary functions.


Chapter 3

8. Touch [Auxiliary].
p.3-44

4016P068CA

9. Setting the number of copies.


From the 10-Key Pad, set the desired number of copies
to be made.
* The maximum number of copies that can be set is as
follows:
99 for Di200f/Di251f
999 for Di351f
Useful Tip
There is no limit to the number of copies set in the initial
mode. Administrator Set can, however, be used to limit the
maximum number of copies to be set in the range from 1 to
99.p.9-4

1166O030AA

* If you have entered an incorrect number, press the Clear


key, then enter the correct number.

10. Pressing the Start key.


When you press the Start key, the machine starts the
copy cycle.
* To stop the copy cycle, press the Stop key.p.2-37
1166O244EA

Useful Tip
The number of pages of data the machine can scan at one time is about 40 for Di200f and about 120 for
Di251f/Di351f based on an Letter standard original.
If optional Memory is installed, it expands the scanning capacity up to about 280 pages.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Making Copies

Leaving a file margin on the copy


Using OHP Interleaving

3-4

2. Selecting the Paper

Chapter 3

Touch [Basics] and [Paper] to show the screen that allows you to select the paper.

4017P001EA

Making Copies

Paper Size
Auto Paper
In the Auto Paper mode, the machine
automatically selects the paper of optimum size
according to the size of the original being used and
zoom ratio selected for use.
Touch [Auto Paper].

4017P001EA

NOTES
The original sizes that can be detected in the
Auto Paper mode are 1117 L, Legal L, Letter
L, and Letter C. The machine may not be able
to detect, or may detect erroneously, the size of
an original of any other size or irregular size.
(Mounting an optional part will enable the
machine to detect 5-1/28-1/2 L, FLS, A3 L, B4
L, A4 L, A4 C, and B5 C. For details, ask your
Tech. Rep.)
When wrinkled, dog-eared, or curled originals
are used, select the paper size before making
copies.
When the document feeder is used, the machine
determines the paper size when the first
original is taken up and fed in. It then uses that
paper size for the subsequent originals (except
in the Mixed Original Detection mode).
Useful Tips
This mode is efficient when you want to make
copies on paper of the same size as your
originals automatically.
Priority settings for the initial mode can be
made with Users Choice.p.8-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-5

Auto Drawer Switching


If the drawer currently selected for use runs out of
paper and there is another drawer loaded with
paper of the same size and in the same direction,
the machine automatically selects that second
drawer to continue copying.

Touch [Paper] on the Basic screen, and the


Touch Panel shows which drawer holds
which paper size.

4017P001EA

Touch the desired paper size key.

4017P002EA

1 1st Drawer
2 2nd Drawer
3 3rd Drawer

4 4th Drawer
5 5th Drawer

Manual Bypass Tray

* Some keys are not available on the Touch Panel,


depending on the type of options mounted on
the machine.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful Tip
This feature is a great advantage when you need
to make a large number of copies on the same
size paper.
<Di200f>
You can make up to 2,250 copies without
interruption if, for example, the 250-sheet
drawer is combined with four 500-sheet
drawers.
<Di251f/Di351f>
You can make up to 3,750 copies without
interruption if, for example, the 250-sheet
drawer is combined with two 500-sheet
drawers and a Large Capacity Cabinet.

Making Copies

Manual Selection
The paper size can be set manually.

Chapter 3

2. Selecting the Paper

3-6
2. Selecting the Paper

Special Paper Setting

Chapter 3

If the symbol S , 2 ,
appears on the
paper size key on the Touch Panel, it means that
drawer has been designated for special paper.

Making Copies

4017P003EA

The machine provides three different types of


special paper setting, each having a specific
purpose as detailed below.
The setting can be made with Users Choice.
p.8-2

: Recycled paper

This setting precludes the Auto Paper mode. You


may be using both recycled as well as plain paper
loaded in your machine. If, for example, you
choose this setting for the drawer loaded with
recycled paper, the machine will not select that
particular drawer in the Auto Paper mode. This
allows you to make copies on plain paper first.

: Disabling 2-sided copying

This setting precludes 2-sided copying.


: Exclusive paper
This setting precludes both Auto Paper mode and
Automatic Drawer Switching. Choose this setting
when using paper for cover/inserts (e.g., colored
paper), to prevent that paper from being used for
other purposes.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-7
2. Selecting the Paper

Manual Bypass Copying


Use Manual Bypass to make copies on paper not loaded in any drawer, or to copy onto OHP
transparencies, Card, or any other special paper.
The setting of the paper size is needed for manual bypass copying.

Paper that Can be Used for Manual Bypass

Using the Manual Bypass Tray

Place the original on the Original Glass and


make the control panel settings.

Swing down the Manual Bypass Tray.

Slide the Paper Guides to the size of the


paper and insert a sheet of paper.

4015O051AB

4015O050AB

NOTES
Correct any curl if you are using Card.
When making copies on Card, OHP
transparencies, or labels, the following
functions cannot be used: 2-sided copying,
Booklet Creation, Staple, and Hole Punch.
The copy will be made on the side facing down.
Useful Tip
Continuous multiple copies can be made if Card,
OHP transparencies, or labels are loaded in the
1st Drawer. p.10-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Making Copies

Chapter 3

Types of Paper
Plain paper (weighing 16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper
Card (weighing 24-1/4 lb to 41-3/4 lb), labels
OHP transparencies
Paper Size
Max. Size: 11-11/1617
Minimum Size: 3-9/165-1/2

3-8
2. Selecting the Paper

<Using Metric Size Paper>


Touching [Metric] on the screen given in step 4
opens a screen that allows you to select an metric
paper size.

Select the desired paper size.

4017P004EA

Touch [OHP/Card] and select the type of


paper.

4017P006EA

Useful Tip
Touching [Inch] returns you to the screen that
allows you to select a inch paper size.

Making Copies

Chapter 3

4017P005EA

Useful Tip
Select Card when labels have been loaded.

6
7

Touch [Enter].
Press the Start key.

Useful Tip
The machine automatically starts the copy cycle
when paper is inserted into the Manual Bypass
Tray after the first copy.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-9
2. Selecting the Paper

<Using Nonstandard Size Paper>


Touch [Custom Size] on the screen given in step
4.

<Calling up a Paper Size from Memory>


You can store the most frequently used paper sizes
in memory and recall them later as necessary.

4017P007EA

Touch [] or [] to set the whole number for X


and touch [X]. The underline moves to the
fractional part. Set the fraction with [] or [].
Now the value for X has been fixed.

4017P007EA

From among the two sizes previously stored in


memory, select the desired one.

4017P008EA

Do the same for [Y].


Touch [Enter].

4017P009EA

Useful Tip
Its a good idea to store frequently used paper
sizes in memory.p.3-10
Touch [Enter].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Making Copies

Chapter 3

Touch [Custom Size] on the screen given in step


4.

3-10
2. Selecting the Paper

Touch [Custom Size].

Touch [Memorize Paper Size].

Touch [] or [] to set the whole number


for Y and touch [Y]. The underline moves to
the fractional part. Set the fraction with []
or []. Now the value for Y has been fixed.

4017P007EA

4017P012EA

Making Copies

Chapter 3

Memorize Paper Size

Touch [1] or [2].

4017P010EA

Touch [] or [] to set the whole number


for X and touch [X]. The underline moves to
the fractional part. Set the fraction with []
or []. Now the value for X has been fixed.

4017P013EA

NOTE
When a new paper size is stored in a key number,
the old one stored in that key number is lost.

4017P011EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter].

3-11
2. Selecting the Paper

Changing the Paper Size


If you change the paper size in mid-operation
while making copies continuously through the
Manual Bypass Tray, the paper size must be set
again.
Touch [Paper] and then [Bypass].

Select the desired copy paper size.

Touch [OHP/Card] and then select the type


of paper.

4017P014EA

4017P004EA

4017P005EA

Touch [Enter].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Making Copies

Chapter 3

3-12

3. Selecting the Zoom


Zoom Ratio

Chapter 3

When you touch [Zoom] after touching [Basics] on the Touch Panel, a screen appears that allows you to
set the zoom ratio. There are six different ways to choose from to set the zoom ratio. Select according to
your need.

Making Copies

4017P015EA

Auto Size
In the Auto Size mode, the machine automatically
selects the zoom ratio according to the size of the
original being used and the paper size selected for
use.

Touch [Auto Size] to set the machine into the


Auto Size mode.

Useful Tips
This mode is very helpful for neat filing when
you need to make copies from originals of
assorted sizes.
Priority settings for the initial mode can be
made with Users Choice.p.8-2

Selecting the Fixed Zoom


The machine provides the most frequently used
zoom ratios ready for immediate use.

Touch the appropriate original-to-copy-size


representation key. There are four reduction
and four enlargement ratios.

4017P016EA

Select the paper size.


Selecting the Paperp.3-4

NOTE
When the document feeder is used, the machine
determines the zoom ratio when the first original
is taken up and fed in and uses that zoom ratio
for subsequent originals (except in the Mixed
Original Detection mode).

4017P017EA

When you touch [Full Size], full size


(1.000) will be selected.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-13
3. Selecting the Zoom

For a Slightly Smaller Image

Using Zoom Up/Down Keys

This function lets you make a copy slightly


reduced in image size from that of the original.

Touching [] or [] changes the zoom ratio in


0.001 increments. You can hold down the key to
change the ratio quickly.

Touch [Minimal] and set the zoom ratio.

Hold down [] or [] until the desired


zoom ratio is reached.

4017P018EA

Useful Tips
A value of 0.930 has been factoryprogrammed in [Minimal], but that ratio can
be changed as necessary.p.3-16
This is a handy way of making a copy, without
losing any portion of the original image, from
an original which has an image area covering
its entire surface.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4017P019EA

Useful Tips
To save time, first select the fixed zoom ratio
nearest to the target ratio before using [] or
[].
The zoom ratio can be set in the range between
0.250 and 4.000.

Making Copies

Chapter 3

3-14
3. Selecting the Zoom

Using the 10-Key Pad


You can use the 10-Key Pad to directly enter the
zoom ratio.
<Same ratio for X and Y>

<Using the X / Y Zoom>

Touch [Custom Zoom].

Making Copies

Chapter 3

Touch [Custom Zoom].

4017P020EA

Enter the Zoom Ratio from the 10-Key Pad.

4017P020EA

Touch [X/Y Zoom].

1166O030AA

Useful Tip
Example: 1.300
Press 1, 3, 0, and 0, in that order.

4016P021CA

Touch [Reduce] or [Enlarge].

1149O160BA

To correct a ratio, press the Clear key and then


enter the correct one.
The zoom ratio can be set in the range between
0.250 and 4.000.

Touch [Enter].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4017P022EA

Useful Tip
The zoom ratio can range between 1.001 and
4.000 if Enlarge is selected and between 0.250
and 1.000 if Reduce is selected.

3-15
3. Selecting the Zoom

Touch [X] and enter the zoom ratio from the


10-Key Pad.

Calling up a Ratio from Memory


You can store the most frequently used zoom
ratios in memory and recall them later as
necessary.
Touch [Custom Zoom].

Chapter 3

4017P023EA

Useful Tip
To correct a ratio, press the Clear key and then
enter the correct one.

Touch [Y] and enter the zoom ratio from the


10-Key Pad.

Touch [Enter].

4017P020EA

From among the two ratios previously stored


in memory and [Minimal], select the desired
one.

4016P024CA

Useful Tip
Its a good idea for you to store frequently used
zoom ratios in memory.p.3-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter].

Making Copies

3-16
3. Selecting the Zoom

Storing a Ratio in Memory

Touch [Custom Zoom].

Useful Tip
Example: 1.300
Press 1, 3, 0, and 0, in that order.

Making Copies

Chapter 3

1149O160BA

4017P020EA

Touch [Memorize Zoom Ratio].

To correct a ratio, press the Clear key and then


enter the correct one.
The ratio from Memory can range between
0.250 and 4.000.
The [Minimal] ratio can range between 0.900
and 0.999.

Touch memory location key [1], [2] or


[Minimal] to store the set zoom ratio.

4016P025CA

Using the 10 -Key Pad, enter the desired


zoom ratio.

4016P027CA

* When the key is touched, the ratio is shown


on the key, indicating that it has been stored in
memory.
NOTE
When a new ratio is stored, the old one is erased.

5
4016P026CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter].

3-17

Making Copies

Chapter 3

3. Selecting the Zoom

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-18

4. Selecting the Finishing Function

Chapter 3

When you touch [Finishing] after touching [Basics] on the Touch Panel, a screen appears that allows you
to set a particular finishing function.

4017P029EA

Making Copies

Finishing Functions
Non-Sort
Orig.

Copy

All copies are fed out without being sorted,


grouped, stapled or punched.
Touch [Non-Sort].

4002O055AA

Sort

Copy

This function is effective when making multiple


copies from multiple originals. Copies are sorted
into complete sets of the originals.
Touch [Sort].

Orig.

4002O056AA

Group

Copy

The copies made from each original are separated


into groups. Each group contains the same
number of copies.
Touch [Group].

Orig.

4002O057AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-19
4. Selecting the Finishing Function

Staple

Copy

4002O058AA

Hole Punch

Copy

<Only when the Finisher FN-109/Mailbin


Finisher is mounted>
Holes are punched in the copy sets or stacks for
filing. It can be combined with Non-Sort, Sort,
Group or Staple.
Touch [Hole Punch].

Orig.

4002O285EA

Useful Tip
The machine has been factory-set to automatically switch between Sort and Non-Sort depending on the
number of originals and the number of copies to be made. It has also been set to automatically select
Non-Sort in the initial mode. These default settings can be changed with Users Choice.p.8-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Making Copies

Orig.

Chapter 3

<Only when the Finisher/Mailbin Finisher is


mounted>
This function is effective when making multiple
copies from multiple originals. Copies are sorted
or grouped into complete sets of the originals and
then stapled.
Touch [Staple].

3-20
4. Selecting the Finishing Function

Selecting the Finishing Function


Non-Sort

Sort/Group

Touch [Sort] or [Group].

Chapter 3

Touch [Non-Sort].

Making Copies

4017P028EA

NOTE
Card and OHP transparencies cannot be used
for making copies in Staple and Punch.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4017P029EA

NOTES
Separate Scan will be automatically activated if
an original is place directly on the Original
Glass in the Sort mode.p.3-61
If the machine is equipped with a Shift Tray,
Finisher, or Mailbin Finisher, copies are fed
out in a sawtooth manner. If the machine is
equipped with a Job Tray, or if it is not fitted
with a Shift Tray, Finisher, or Mailbin
Finisher, copies are fed out in a crisscross
manner.
Crisscross sorting is possible only when all of
the following conditions are met:
The machine is loaded with paper of the same
size, but in two different directions.
The machine is loaded with paper of the same
type, but in two different directions.
Mixed Original Detection is not set in Auto
Paper.
None of the Staple, Hole Punch, Page
Insertion, Cover, or Image Repeat functions
are set.
An original is placed on the Original Glass,
while drawer is yet to be selected.

3-21
4. Selecting the Finishing Function

4002O061AB

Making Copies

Crisscross Sorting
The sorted copy sets are stacked in a crisscross
manner, one set stacked lengthwise on top of
another set stacked crosswise.

Chapter 3

Useful Tips
Shift Sorting
The sorted copy sets are stacked in the same
direction, but in a sawtooth manner by shifting
the tray to the front or rear for each set.

4002O062AB

Shift Grouping
The grouped copy stacks are stacked in the
same direction, but in a sawtooth manner by
shifting the tray to the front or rear for each
stack.

4002O063AB

Crisscross Grouping
The grouped copy stacks are stacked in a
crisscross manner, one stack stacked
lengthwise on top of another stack stacked
crosswise.

4002O064AB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-22
4. Selecting the Finishing Function

Staple
<When Finisher FN-109 is mounted>
Touch the desired finishing function key.

Touch the stapling key of your choice.

Touch [Select Position].

Touch the desired stapling type.

Chapter 3

Making Copies

4017P029EA

4017P031EA

4017P030EA

You have a choice of the following two stapling


types:

4016P032CA

Touch [Enter].

Corner Staple

Paper size : 1117 L to Letter


Type of paper : Plain paper,
recycled paper
Number of sheets : 2 to 50
4015O001AA

2-Point Staple

Paper size : 1117 L to Letter


Type of paper : Plain paper,
recycled paper
Number of sheets : 2 to 50
4002O068AA

* When you touch a stapling key in the NonSort mode, the Finisher is automatically set
into the Sort mode.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

NOTES
Stapling is not possible in the Interrupt mode.
Check the correct direction of the originals
when making copies in the Staple mode.
p.3-26
Stapling position cannot be specified if Corner
Staple is selected. It can, however, be specified
if Corner Staple is combined with Hole Punch.
If an original is placed directly on the Original
Glass in the Staple mode, Separate Scan is
automatically set.p.3-61
Make sure that the maximum number of sheets
to be stapled together is not exceeded when
making copies in the Staple mode.

3-23

Touch the desired finishing function key.

4016P033CA

Touch [Corner Staple].

4016P034CA

With Corner Staple, the staple is driven into the


copies at the location shown below:

A
4015O001AA

Paper size : 1117 L to Letter


Type of paper : Plain paper,
recycled paper
No. of sheets to be stapled together:
Mailbin Finisher : 2 to 50
Finisher
: 2 to 30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

NOTES
When [Corner Staple] is touched with Non-Sort
selected, the Finisher is automatically set into
the Sort mode.
Stapling is not possible in the Interrupt mode.
Stapling position cannot be specified if the
machine is equipped with a Finisher FN-110 or
Mailbin Finisher. When a Mailbin Finisher is
mounted, however, stapling position can be
specified if the function is combined with Hole
Punch.
Check the correct direction of the originals
when making copies in the Staple mode.
p.3-26
If an original is placed directly on the Original
Glass in a Staple mode, Separate Scan is
automatically set.p.3-61
Make sure that the maximum number of sheets
to be stapled together is not exceeded when
making copies in the Staple mode.

Making Copies

<When Finisher FN-110 or Mailbin Finisher is


mounted>

Chapter 3

4. Selecting the Finishing Function

3-24
4. Selecting the Finishing Function

Hole Punch
<Only when the Finisher FN-109/Mailbin Finisher
is mounted>

Touch the desired finishing function key.

Useful Tips
If you do not select a hole-punching position,
the machine automatically sets the Hole Punch
position according to the original feeding
direction as illustrated below.

Chapter 3

Orig.

Copy

1155O789EA

Orig.

Copy

Making Copies

4017P029EA

Touch [Hole Punch].


155O790EA

When making copies from either the 1117 L


size, the machine automatically specifies the
hole punching position as shown below.
Orig.

Copy

1155O791EA

4017P035EA

NOTES
The sizes of the paper for Hole Punch are
1117 L and Letter C.
Hole Punch is not possible in the Interrupt
mode.
When making copies in the Hole Punch Mode,
make sure to load the originals in the document
feeder in the correct direction. p.3-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-25
4. Selecting the Finishing Function

[Select Position] key:


Use this key when you want to place your original
in a direction other than the standard or make
punch holes in positions other than those made
automatically.
Touch [Select Position].

4017P036EA

Touch the desired hole-punching position.

4017P037EA

Useful Tip
If [OFF] is selected, the machine automatically
determines the hole-punching position according
to the applicable original feeding direction.

Touch [Enter].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Making Copies

Chapter 3

3-26
4. Selecting the Finishing Function

Hints for Stapling Position


The staple is placed at different positions depending on the size and orientation of the paper.
Study this diagram to select the correct paper size according to the desired stapling position.

Finisher FN-109
<Selecting the Corner Staple>
Loading the Originals

Making Copies

Chapter 3

Panel Display

Using Duplexing
Document Feeder

Using Automatic
Document Feeder

Through Original
Glass

Stapling Position

Original : Letter C

Original : Letter C

Original : Letter C

Paper Size : Letter C

4015O052AC

4015O053AC

4015O054AD

Original : Letter C

Original : Letter C

Original : Letter C

4015O052AC

4015O053AC

4015O054AD

Original : Letter L

Original : Letter L

Original : Letter L

4015O055AC

4015O056AC

4015O057AD

Original : Letter L

Original : Letter L

Original : Letter L

4015O055AC

4015O056AC

4015O057AD

Original : 1117 L,
Legal L

Original : 1117 L,
Legal L

Original : 1117 L,
Legal L

4015O061AC

4015O062AC

4015O063AD

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4002O358AA

Paper Size : Letter L

4002O353AA

Paper Size :Letter C

4002O359AA

Paper Size : Letter L

4002O355AA

Original : 1117 L,
Legal L

4002O359AA

3-27
4. Selecting the Finishing Function

<Selecting the 2-Point Staple>


Loading the Originals
Panel Display

Using Duplexing
Document Feeder

Using Automatic
Document Feeder

Through Original
Glass

Stapling Position

Original : Letter C

Original : Letter C

Original : Letter C

Paper Size : Letter C

4015O052AC

4015O053AC

4015O054AD

Original : Letter C

Original : Letter C

Original : Letter C

4015O052AC

4015O053AC

4015O054AD

Original : Letter L

Original : Letter L

Original : Letter L

4015O055AC

4015O056AC

4015O057AD

Original : Letter L

Original : Letter L

Original : Letter L

Paper Size : Letter L

1155O431AA
4015O003AA

Paper Size : Letter C

4012P038CA

4015O004AA

1155O431AA

Paper Size : Letter L

1155O430AA
4015O055AC

4015O056AC

4015O057AD

Original : 1117 L,
Legal L

Original : 1117 L,
Legal L

Original : 1117 L,
Legal L

4015O061AC

4015O062AC

4015O063AD

4015O005AA

Original : 1117 L,
Legal L

4012P038CA

4015O005AA

1155O430AA

NOTES
Set Auto Size if you staple at the position shown in the above list.
Set Original Direction if you place your original in a direction different from these examples.
p.3-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Making Copies

4015O002AA

1155O430AA

Chapter 3

4012P038CA

3-28
4. Selecting the Finishing Function

Finisher FN-110
<Selecting the Corner Staple>
Loading the Originals

Making Copies

Chapter 3

Panel Display

Using Duplexing
Document Feeder

Using Automatic
Document Feeder

Through Original
Glass

Stapling Position

Original : Letter C

Original : Letter C

Original : Letter C

Paper Size : Letter C

4015O052AC

4015O053AC

4015O054AD

Original : Letter L

Original : Letter L

Original : Letter L

4015O055AC

4015O056AC

4015O057AD

Original : 1117 L,
Legal L

Original : 1117 L,
Legal L

Original : 1117 L,
Legal L

4015O061AC

4015O062AC

4015O063AD

4002O358AA

Paper Size : Letter L

4002O355AA

Original : 1117 L,
Legal L

4002O359AA

NOTE
Set Original Direction if you place your original in a direction different from these examples.
p.3-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-29
4. Selecting the Finishing Function

Mailbin Finisher
<Selecting the Corner Staple>

Using Automatic
Document Feeder

Through Original
Glass

Stapling Position

Original : Letter C

Original : Letter C

Original : Letter C

Paper Size : Letter C

4015O052AC

4015O053AC

4015O054AD

Original : Letter L

Original : Letter L

Original : Letter L

4015O055AC

4015O056AC

4015O057AD

Original : 1117 L,
Legal L

Original : 1117 L,
Legal L

Original : 1117 L,
Legal L

4015O061AC

4015O062AC

4015O063AD

4002O358AA

Paper Size : Letter L

4002O359AA

Original : 1117 L,
Legal L

4002O359AA

NOTE
Set Original Direction if you place your original in a direction different from these examples.
p.3-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Making Copies

Using Duplexing
Document Feeder

Chapter 3

Loading the Originals


Panel Display

3-30
4. Selecting the Finishing Function

Hints for Stapling


When copies are made using the stapling function, the stapled copy sets may not be neatly stacked on the
tray or may even fall off the tray unless certain conditions are met regarding the number of copies to be
stapled and the number of copy sets to be made. Use the following table as guide when making copies.
Copy Set Capacity

Making Copies

Chapter 3

No. of Copies Stapled

When Finisher FN-109 is


Mounted

When Finisher FN-110 is


Mounted

When Mailbin Finisher is


Mounted

1117 L to Letter

1117 L to Letter

1117 L to Letter

2 copies

100 sets

100 sets

200 sets

3 to 5 copies

80 sets

80 sets

150 sets

6 to 10 copies

60 sets

60 sets

100 sets

11 to 20 copies

40 sets

40 sets

50 sets

21 to 30 copies

60 sets

33 sets

33 sets

31 to 40 copies

60 sets

25 sets

41 to 50 copies

60 sets

20 sets

Hints for Hole-Punching Position


Note the correct direction of the originals if the copies are to be punched using Hole Punch.
Panel

Using Duplexing
Document Feeder

Using Automatic
Document Feeder

Punched Hole Position

Punched Hole Position

Through Original Glass


Punched Hole Position

1170P097EA
1166O107EA

Punched Hole Position

4015O215EA

Punched Hole Position

1166O109EB

Punched Hole Position

1170P098EA
4015O217EB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4015O213EB

4015O211EB

5. Selecting the Original

Copy Type

Copy] on the Touch Panel, a screen appears that allows you to choose the

Copy Type
Double-Sided Single-Sided
<Only when the document feeder is mounted>
Select Double-Sided Single-Sided to make two
1-sided copies from a 2-sided original.
Chapter 3

Single-Sided Single-Sided
Select Single-Sided Single-Sided to make a 1sided copy from a 1-sided original.

Original

When you touch [Orig.


orig. copy type.

3-31

1166O049AA

Double-Sided Double-Sided
<Only when a document feeder and Duplex Unit
are mounted>
Select Double-Sided Double-Sided to make a 2sided copy from a 2-sided original.

Single-Sided Double-Sided
<Only when the Duplex Unit is mounted.>
Select Single-Sided Double-Sided to make a 2sided copy from two 1-sided originals.

1166O054AA

1166O050AA

Double-Sided Single-[2in1]
<Di251f/Di351f only>
<Only when the document feeder is mounted>
Select Double-Sided Single-[2in1] to make a 1sided side-by-side copy, through reduction, from a
2-sided original.

Single-Sided Single-[2in1]
Select Single-Sided Single-[2in1] to make a 1sided side-by-side copy, through reduction, from
two 1-sided originals.

1166O051AA
1166O055AA

1166O052AB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Double-Sided Double-[2in1]
<Di251f/Di351f only>
<Only when a document feeder and Duplex Unit
are mounted>
Select Double-Sided Double-[2in1] to make a
2-sided side-by-side copy, through reduction, from
two 2-sided originals.

Single-Sided Double-[2in1]
<Only when the Duplex Unit is mounted.>
Select Single-Sided Double-[2in1] to make a 2sided copy, through reduction, from four 1-sided
originals. Each pair of originals will be placed
side-by-side on either side of the copy.

1166O056AB

Making Copies

1166O053AA

Copy Type

Double-Sided Single-[4in1]
<Di351f only>
<Only when a document feeder is mounted>
Select Double-Sided Single-[4in1] to copy two
different 2-sided originals (4 pages) onto one side
of a single sheet of paper.

1166O061AA

1166O057AA

Double-Sided Double-[4in1]
<Di351f only>
<Only when a document feeder and Duplex Unit
are mounted>
Select Double-Sided Double-[4in1] to copy four
different 2-sided originals (8 pages) onto both
sides of a single sheet of paper, each side
containing four pages of the originals.

Single-Sided Double-[4in1]
<Di351f only>
<Only when the Duplex Unit is mounted.>
Select Single-Sided Double-[4in1] to copy eight
different 1-sided originals onto both sides of a
single sheet of paper, each side containing four
pages of the originals.

Making Copies

Chapter 3

Single-Sided Single-[4in1]
<Di251f/Di351f only>
Select Single-Sided Single-[4in1] to copy four
different 1-sided originals onto one side of a single
sheet of paper.

5. Selecting the Original

3-32

1166O062AC
4015O260AA

Single-Sided Booklet Creation


<Di251f/Di351f only>
<Only when the Duplex Unit is mounted>
Select Single-Sided Booklet Creation to copy
four different 1-sided originals onto both sides of a
single sheet of paper. The pages will be in correct
order when the page is folded in half.

1166O067AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5. Selecting the Original

Book/Separation Double-Sided
<Only when the Duplex Unit is mounted>
Select Book/Separation Double-Sided to make a
2-sided copy of an open book.

1166O059AB

1166O060AA
1166O064AB

Double-[2in1] Single-Sided
<Only when the Duplexing Document Feeder is
mounted>
Select Double-[2in1] Single-Sided to make 1sided page-by-page copies of a 2-sided original
which is the result of 2-in-1 copying.

Single-[2in1] Single-Sided
<Only when the Duplexing Document Feeder is
mounted>
Select Single-[2in1] Single-Sided to make 1sided page-by-page copies of a 1-sided original
which is the result of 2-in-1 copying.

1166O065AA
1166O069AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Making Copies

Book/Spreadsheet Double-Sided
<Only when the Duplex Unit is mounted>
Select Book/Spreadsheet Double-Sided to make
a 2-sided copy from an open book with the pages
in proper sequence.

Chapter 3

1166O063AA

Book/Spreadsheet Single-Sided
Select Book/Spreadsheet Single-Sided to make
a 1-sided copy from an open book.

Copy Type

Book/Separation Single-Sided
Select Book/Separation Single-Sided to make 1sided page-by-page copies of an open book.

3-33

Copy Type

Selecting the Original

5. Selecting the Original

3-34

Copy Type

Using Single-Sided or Double-Sided


Originals

Making Copies

Chapter 3

Load the originals.

4015O244AA

NOTE
If an Automatic Document Feeder is used to copy
2-sided originals, the first side of each original is
scanned and then the document set is turned over
to let the machine scan the second side of each
original.

NOTES
When 2-in-1, 4-in-1, or Booklet function is
selected, the machine automatically selects a
default zoom ratio. You can, however, opt for
not recalling the default zoom ratio, see Users
Choice. p.8-2
Users Choice also allows you to program a
specific page order for 4-in-1. p.8-2
<Di200f only>
To copy using Double-[2in1]:
Touch Double-[2in1].

Select the original type.

4017P041EA

4016P039CA

Select the desired copy type.

<Di251f/Di351f only>
To copy using Double-[2in1], Booklet,
Single-[4in1], Double-[4in1]
Touch [4in1/Booklet].
Select the desired copy type and touch
[Enter].

4016P040CA
4016P042DA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5. Selecting the Original

3-35
Copy Type

[Original Direction] key


Use this key when you want to place your original
in a direction other than the standard.
NOTE
The [Original Direction] key is invalid when the
Automatic Document Feeder is used.
Touch [Original Direction].

4016P043CA

Select the position of the original.

4016P044CA

Touch [Enter].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Making Copies

Chapter 3

5. Selecting the Original

3-36
Copy Type

Hold down [] or []until the desired


margin width is reached.

Original with no
File Margin

Chapter 3

Original with
a File Margin

4017P046EA

1155O735AA

If your original has a file margin


Making Copies

[Margin] key for the original:


When youre going to make copies using SingleSided Double-Sided or Double-Sided SingleSided, first check to see if your original has a file
margin in it. The machine can correct the margin
position to make good copies.

Useful Tip
You can change the margin width in 1/16 inch
increments within the range 0 inch to 3/4 inch.

Touch [Margin].

Touch [Enter].

NOTE
The [Margin] key is invalid when the Automatic
Document Feeder is used.
Useful Tips
If the margin position is set to Left, the image
on both the first and second sides of the copy
will have the same orientation as that on the
original.
4016P045CA

Select the desired margin position.


You have a choice of the following two
Margin Positions.

Orig.

Copy

Margin Position (Left)


4002O013AB

Orig.

Copy

If the margin position is set to Top, the image


on the second side of the copy will be inverted
to that on the first side.
Orig.

Copy

1155O635AA

Margin Position (Top)


Orig.

Copy

4002O048AB

If your original has no file margin


1155O636AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Its not necessary to correct the margin position


and width if your original has no file margin.

5. Selecting the Original

3-37
Copy Type

Book

1
2

Load the originals.

Touch [Standard Book] or [Right Bound].

Select Book for the type of original.

4017P050EA

Touch [Separation] or [Spreadsheet].


Making Copies

4
4016P047CA

Touch [Book].

4017P051EA

If you want to erase the four edges or center,


touch [Book Erase].

4016P048CA

<When the Duplexing Document Feeder is not


mounted>
Touch [Book].

4017P052EA

4016P049CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 3

<When the Duplexing Document Feeder is


mounted>
Touch [Book/Separation].

5. Selecting the Original

Making Copies

Chapter 3

3-38
Copy Type

Select the particular erase function (Book


Erase).

Hold down [] or []until the desired erase


width is reached. Then touch [Enter].

4017P053EA

Useful Tip
You have a choice of the following three types of
erase:
Frame Erase
Erase a given width along the four
edges.

4017P054EA

Useful Tips
You can change the erase width in 1/16 inch
increments within the range 1/4 inch to 3/4
inch.
Center Erase width has been set to 1/2 inch. To
change the value, consult your Tech. Rep.

8
9

Touch [Enter].
Select the desired copy type.

1149O055AA

Center Erase
Erase a given width down the center.

4017P055EA

1149O057AA

Frame + Center Erase


Erase a given width along the four edges
as well as down the center.

1149O058AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

NOTE
When Book is used to make copies, none of 2in1,
4in1, and Booklet is valid.

5. Selecting the Original

<To copy using Separation and 2-sided>


<Di251f/Di351f only>
Touch [Page Order].

Copy Type

You have a choice of either one of the


following two arrangement types.
Book Order

4002O030AB

Standard

4002O031AB

Touch [Enter].
Making Copies

NOTE
When copying with Di200f using Separation and
2-sided, copies are automatically made in book
order.

4017P057EA

Chapter 3

Select the desired page arrangement.

4017P056EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-39

5. Selecting the Original

3-40
Copy Type

2-in-1 Originals

Load the originals.

Touch [Single-Sided] for Copy.

Making Copies

Chapter 3

1166O225AB

NOTE
Make sure to load the originals lengthwise.
4017P059EA

NOTE
With 2-in-1 originals, 2-in-1, 4-in-1, and Booklet
Creation are not available for copying.

Touch [Book/Separation].

4016P047CA

Select the original type.

4016P058CA

NOTE
When the 2-in-1 function is selected, the machine
automatically selects a default zoom ratio. You
can, however, opt for not recalling the default
zoom ratio with Users Choice. p.8-2

Touch [Enter].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5. Selecting the Original

3-41
Copy Type

Some Precautions for Making Copies


Precautions for Book Copying
Place the open book so that its top edge is at the rear of the machine and the center of the book is
aligned with the Book Marker indicated on the Original Length Scale.
Make copies in ascending order of page.
Select the desired zoom ratio and paper size.
Placing the Book on the Glass Correctly
Book Marker

4015O049AB
1166O186AA

Precautions for Copying through Original Glass


If an original is placed directly on the Original Glass in 2-Sided, 2in1, 4in1, or Booklet, Separate Scan
will be automatically set.p.3-61
Separate Scan will not be set, however, if the following settings have been made: Book - Separation - 2Sided Copy - Page Order - Standard.

Handy Feature Available from Initial Mode Setting

Touch this key to easily set the 1-Sided


Sided mode.

4016P060CA

Useful Tip
Users Choice can be used to change the settings of initial mode. p.8-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The initial setting for the original copy type is 1-Sided 1-Sided. If this setting is changed to 1Sided 2-Sided or 2-Sided 2-Sided, the Basic screen shows a [1-Sided 1-Sided] key.

1-

Making Copies

Chapter 3

Original Length Scale

3-42

6. Selecting the Density


Image Density

Chapter 3

When you touch [Density] on the Touch Panel, a screen appears that allows you to set the exposure level
for the image density.
Density offers a choice of [Text], [Photo], or [Text/Photo]. Select according to your needs.

Making Copies

4016P061CA

Useful Tip
The machine has been factory-set to automatically select the Auto Exposure mode. Users Choice can
be used to change this default setting to the Manual Exposure mode.p.8-2

Text
Text emphasizes outlines to produce clear-cut text
as it appears on the copy.
<Auto Exposure>
When in the Auto Exposure mode, the machine
automatically adjusts the exposure level for the
optimum copy image density.

1
2

Touch [Text].

<Manual Exposure>
In the Manual Exposure mode, you can vary the
exposure by nine levels.

1
2

Touch [Text].
Touch [Lighter] or [Darker] as necessary.

Touch [Auto].
[Auto] is highlighted, indicating that the
machine is set into the Auto Exposure mode.

4016P062CA

4016P061CA

Useful Tip
The exposure level in the Auto Exposure mode
can be made either Darker or Lighter with
Users Choice.p.8-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful Tips
To make the image darker, touch [Darker].
To make the image lighter, touch [Lighter].

3-43
6. Selecting the Density

Photo

Text/Photo

The machine can make a faithful reproduction of


an original having a halftone image, such as
photos.

Select Text/Photo when you make copies from an


original that contains both text and photos.

Touch [Text/Photo].
[Text/Photo] is highlighted, indicating that
the machine is set into the Text/Photo mode.

4016P063CA
4016P065CA

Touch [Lighter] or [Darker] as necessary.

4016P066CA

NOTES
When making copies in the Photo mode, Auto
Exposure does not operate. Select the desired
exposure level in the Manual Exposure mode.
Touching [Auto] automatically selects [Text].
Useful Tips
To make the image darker, touch [Darker].
To make the image lighter, touch [Lighter].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Lighter], [Auto], or [Darker] to


adjust the exposure level as necessary.

4016P064CA

Useful Tips
The exposure level in the Auto Exposure mode
can be made either Darker or Lighter
with Users Choice.p.8-2
To make the image darker, touch [Darker].
To make the image lighter, touch [Lighter].

Making Copies

Chapter 3

Touch [Photo].
[Photo] is highlighted, indicating that the
machine is set into the Photo mode.

3-44

7. Auxiliary Functions

Chapter 3

When [Auxiliary] on the Touch Panel is touched, the Auxiliary function menu screen appears allowing
you to set various auxiliary functions.

4016P067CA
4016P068CA

Making Copies

Cover
<Di251f/Di351f only><Only when a document feeder is mounted>
The Cover mode lets you make a front cover or a front and back cover for a copy set by copying the first
page or the first and last page of an original set on different paper from the normal paper, such as colored
paper.
There are six different Cover functions available. Select the appropriate one.

Functions
Front Cover: Copied
Back Cover: None

Front Cover: Blank


Back Cover: None

4002O032AA

Front Cover: Copied


Back Cover: Blank

4002O033AA

Front Cover: Blank


Back Cover: Blank

4002O034AA
4002O035A

Front Cover: Copied


Back Cover: Copied

Front Cover: Blank


Back Cover: Copied

4002O036AA
4002O037AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-45
7. Auxiliary Functions

Using the Cover Mode

Load your originals in the document feeder.

Touch [Cover Mode].

Touch the key for Cover Paper.

Select the drawer in which paper for the


cover has been loaded. Then touch [Enter].

4016P069CA

Select the key for the front cover.

4017P073EA

NOTE
Be sure to load the special paper for cover (e.g.
colored paper) in advance.

Touch [Enter].

4017P070EA

Select the key for the back cover.

4017P074EA

4017P071EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful Tip
Touch [Cancel] to cancel the settings made for
Cover and return to the initial Auxiliary screen.

Making Copies

4017P072EA

Chapter 3

4015O244AA

3-46
7. Auxiliary Functions

Page Insertion
<Di251f/Di351f only><Only when a Duplexing Document Feeder is mounted>
Page Insertion allows you to insert a special sheet of paper (e.g., colored paper) into the copy set.
Two different functions are available. Select the appropriate one.

Functions
Page Insertion <Copied Inserts>

Making Copies

Chapter 3

Orig.

Copy
Specify
Page 2
for Insert

Insert

The machine copies the page, which is specified


for an insert, on paper for inserts (e.g., colored
paper).

4002O038AB

Page Insertion <Non-Copied Inserts>

Orig.

Copy
Specify
Page 2
for Insert

Insert

4002O039AB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The machine inserts a blank sheet of paper for


inserts (e.g., colored paper) at any specified place
between pages.

3-47
7. Auxiliary Functions

Specifying the Place for an Insert


In the Page Insertion mode, you must specify where to place an insert by using Automatic Detection.
Automatic Detection

Orig.

Copy

Copy
Insert
Insert

Making Copies

Insert Marker
Example: 2nd from top

4002O040AD

NOTE
Automatic Detection cannot be performed when the Mixed Original Detection mode is set.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 3

Put a sheet of standard size paper of a different size from the originals at your desired places in the
original set (for convenience, let us call this paper the insert marker) and load the original set onto the
Duplexing Document Feeder. p.3-48
<The machine automatically detects and sets the places for inserts.>

3-48
7. Auxiliary Functions

Using Page Insertion

Put an insert marker into the desired place in


the original set.

Insert Marker

Insert
Marker

4015O196AA
4002O041AC

Example 1: To place a copied insert at the


2nd position from top.

Making Copies

Chapter 3

Load the original set containing insert marks


in the Duplexing Document Feeder.

Touch [Page Insertion].

Orig.
Copy
Insert

4002O042AC
4016P075CA

Example 2: To place a non-copied insert


between pages 1 and 2.
Orig.

Touch the appropriate key for Paper to select


whether to copy onto inserts (With Image) or
not (Blank).

Copy
Insert

4002O043AC

4017P076EA

NOTE
For the insert marker, use standard size paper
that is a different size, or loaded in a different
direction, from the originals.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-49
7. Auxiliary Functions

Touch the paper size key for Insert Paper.

4017P077EA

Select the drawer in which paper for inserts


has been loaded and then touch [Enter].

Press the Start Key to let the machine start


the Auto Detection sequence:
The Duplexing Document Feeder will start
feeding the originals loaded in it to detect the
insert markers and scan the originals.

Making Copies

Chapter 3

4017P078EA

NOTE
Be sure to load the drawer with the paper for
inserts in advance.

Touch [Enter].

4017P079EA

Useful Tip
Touch [Cancel] to cancel the settings made for
Page Insertion and return to the initial Auxiliary
screen.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-50
7. Auxiliary Functions

OHP Interleaving
<Di251f/Di351f only>
When you make copies on transparencies, the OHP Interleaving function can insert copied or non-copied
interleaves after each transparency.
Two different OHP Interleaving functions are available. Select the appropriate one.

Functions

Making Copies

Chapter 3

<Copied Interleaves>
Orig.

Copy

The machine copies onto OHP transparencies and,


after each transparency, inserts a copied sheet of
paper.
Copied
Interleaves

4015O200AA

<Non-Copied Interleaves>
Orig.

Copy

The machine copies onto OHP transparencies and,


after each transparency, inserts a non-copied sheet
of paper.
Non-Copied
Interleaves

4015O201AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-51
7. Auxiliary Functions

Using OHP Interleaving


Touch the key for Insert Paper.

4015O066AB

NOTE
If you are making all copies through the Original
Glass, start with the first page of the set.

4017P82EA

Select the drawer in which paper for


interleaves has been loaded.

Touch [OHP Interleaving].

4017P083EA

4016P080CA

Select whether to copy onto the interleaves


(With Image) or not (Blank).

NOTE
Be sure to load the drawer with the paper for
interleaves in advance.

6
7

Touch [Enter].
Touch the key for OHP Paper.

4017P081EA

4017P084EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 3

Load the originals.

Making Copies

3-52
7. Auxiliary Functions

Select the drawer for OHP transparencies.

Touch [Enter].

4017P085EA

<When the Manual Bypass Tray is selected>


Select the size of the OHP transparencies and
touch [Enter].

Making Copies

Chapter 3

Useful Tip
Touch [Cancel] to cancel the settings made for
OHP Interleaving and return to the initial
Auxiliary screen.

4017P086EA

Place a sheet of OHP transparencies on the


Manual Bypass Tray.

4015O067AB

Useful Tip
When a sheet of OHP transparencies is inserted
into the Manual Bypass Tray, the machine
automatically starts a copy cycle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-53

Making Copies

Chapter 3

7. Auxiliary Functions

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-54
7. Auxiliary Functions

File Margin
The machine provides a file margin along the leading edge for ease in filing.
There are two different ways to make a file margin. Use the one that is most suited to your need.

Functions

Chapter 3

Orig.

Copy

The image of the original is shifted to the right to


make a margin along the left edge of the copy.

1161O002BA

Making Copies

Orig.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Copy

4015O197AB

The image of the original is shifted to the bottom


to make a margin along the top edge of the copy.

3-55
7. Auxiliary Functions

Using File Margin


Load the originals.

4015O066AB

Touch [File Margin].

Useful Tips
You can change the margin width in 1/16 inch
increments within the range 0 inch to 3/4 inch.
Touch [Cancel] to cancel the settings made for
File Margin and return to the initial Auxiliary
screen.

Touch [Enter].

Useful Tips
If the margin position is set to Left, the image
on both the first and second sides of the copy
will have the same orientation as that on the
original.
Orig.

Copy

4016P088CA

Select the desired Position of the margin.

4002O013AB

If the margin position is set to Top, the image


on the second side of the copy will be inverted
to that on the first side.
Orig.

Copy

4017P089EA

Hold down [] or [] until the desired


margin width is reached.

4017P090EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 3

NOTE
Having a margin width larger than necessary
could result in losing part of the image on the
copy. Try to keep a logical margin width.

4002O048AB

Making Copies

3-56
7. Auxiliary Functions

Edge/Frame Erase
The machine erases a margin of a set width along all four edges or any one edge to erase shadows or
other unwanted images. This feature is effective in erasing the communications record on a document
received by fax.
One of three different erase functions can be selected. Use the one that is most suited to your need.

Functions

Chapter 3

Left Edge Erase


Orig.

Copy

Erases a given width from the left edge of the


copy.

Making Copies

1149O053AA

Top Edge Erase


Orig.

Copy

<Di251f/Di351f only>
Erases a given width from the top edge of the
copy.

1149O056AA

Frame Erase
Orig.

Copy

1149O055AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Erases a given width along all four edges.

3-57
7. Auxiliary Functions

Using a Particular Edge/Frame Erase


Function
Hold down [] or [] until the desired erase
width is reached.

Chapter 3

Load the originals.

4015O066AB

Touch [Edge/Frame Erase].


4017P093EA

Useful Tips
You can change the erase width in 1/16 inch
increments within the range 1/4 inch to 3/4
inch.
Touch [Cancel] to cancel the settings made for
Edge/Frame Erase and return to the initial
Auxiliary screen.

4016P091CA

Select the desired erase function Position.

Touch [Enter].

NOTE
The erase width represents that on the original,
not on the copy. So use care when making a
reduction or enlargement copy.
Example: Erasing the margin of an 1117 size
original on a copy reduced by 0.5:
Original
(1117 L)

Copy
(5-1/28-1/2 L)
0.5

4017P092EA

1/2 inch
3/4 inch

1166O255AA

If you select 3/4 inch on the original, 1/2 inchwide margin is erased on the copy.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Making Copies

3-58
7. Auxiliary Functions

Image Repeat
The image of the original is repeatedly produced on the paper.
The machine automatically calculates the number of images that can be placed on the copy based on the
paper size and zoom ratio.

Orig.

Making Copies

Chapter 3

Copy

1155O050AA

Selecting Image Repeat

Load the original.

Touch [Auto Detect].

4015O066AB

2
3

Select the desired paper size and zoom ratio.


Selecting the Paperp.3-4
Selecting the Zoom p.3-12
Touch [Auxiliary] and then [Image Repeat].

4017P095EA

NOTES
When [Auto Detect] is used, the machine
considers the original as a standard size.
If an original of a nonstandard size is placed
directly on the Original Glass, enter the
original size manually.
Useful Tip
Touch [Cancel] to cancel the settings made for
Image Repeat and return to the initial Auxiliary
screen.

4016P094CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter].

3-59
7. Auxiliary Functions

<If the original is a non-standard size>


Touch [Size Input] on the screen given in step 4.

4017P097EA

Select the size of the original.

4017P097EA

Making Copies

Touch [Custom Size].

Chapter 3

<When the original is a standard size>


Touch [Size Input] on the screen given in step 4.

4017P096EA

Touch [Enter].

4017P098EA

Touch [] or [] to set the whole number for X


and touch [X]. The underline moves to the
fractional part. Set the fraction with [] or [].
Now the value for X has been fixed.

4017P099EA

Do the same for [Y].


Touch [Enter].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-60
7. Auxiliary Functions

Distribution
<Di251f/Di351f only>
Places a reference (distribution) number on the background of the copy, as assigned to each copy set.
Orig.

Copy

Making Copies

Chapter 3

4002O075AA

Using Distribution

1
2

Load the originals.


Touch [Distribution #].

Select the page(s) stamped on which to print


the distribution number, either [First page
only] or [All pages].

4016P102CA

4016P100CA

NOTE
When [Distribution #] is selected, the machine
automatically sets the finishing mode to Sort.

Enter the starting number from the 10-Key


Pad.

4016P101CA

Useful Tip
The starting number can range from 000 to 999.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful Tips
If [First page only] is selected, the distribution
number will be stamped only on the first page
of each set.
If [All pages] is selected, the distribution
number will be stamped on all pages.

Select the stamp density, either Darker,


Normal, or Lighter.

Touch [Enter].

Useful Tips
If no starting number has been entered, the
page number starts with 001.
The Distribution number is reset to 000 after
reaching 999.
The distribution number will be printed even
onto the covers and inserts specified for
Blank.

3-61
7. Auxiliary Functions

Separate Scan
Separate Scan permits the machine to scan a large set of originals in several parts.
The Duplexing Document Feeder can be loaded with up to 50 pages of a document. However, if you
divide a document consisting of more than 100 pages so that each part contains less than 50 pages, it can
still be scanned as one set by the machine.
Copy
Example: An 80-page document
Orig.

80 sheets

1155O556AA

NOTE
This function can be used only when the document is loaded in the Duplexing Document Feeder or
placed directly on the Original Glass.

Selecting Separate Scan

Touch [Separate Scan].

Repeat step 3 according to the number of


pages of the document.

Useful Tip
The number of originals that can be scanned and
stored in memory at one time is about 40 pages
of Letter standard paper for Di200f and about
120 pages for Di251f/Di351f. The addition of an
optional Memory expands the maximum storage
capacity to about 280 pages.
4016P104CA

Load the first set of original(s) and press the


Start key.

When all pages of the document have been


scanned, touch [Finish] and press the Start
key.

NOTE
If the original is placed directly on the Original
Glass to make a copy, do this in ascending order
of page number.

Load the next set of originals and press the


Start key.

4017P106EA

4017P105EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The machine will start a copy cycle.

Chapter 3

30 sheets

Making Copies

50 sheets

3-62

8. Using Memory Recall


Memory Recall
Touching [Memory Recall] on the Touch Panel after a copy cycle has been completed will allow you to
make a copy using the previous image data and copying mode without having to reload the original.

Setting Memory Recall

Touch [Memory Recall].

Making Copies

Chapter 3

4017P107EA

To change the number of copies to be made,


enter the new number from the 10-Key Pad.

Press the Start key, and the machine will start


the print cycle.

NOTES
Memory Recall available from Users Choice
must be turned ON to use this function.p.8-2
This function cannot be used in the Interrupt
mode.
The preceding image data and copy settings are
cleared to disable Memory Recall when any of
the following operations is performed:
The machine is turned OFF.
The machine scans a new original (or the Start
key is pressed).
The Access Mode, Interrupt, Utility, Panel
Reset, or Scan key is pressed.
The Clear or Panel Reset key is pressed while
the machine remains idle.

Useful Tip
After you have made copies from a confidential
document, it is recommended that you press the
Panel Reset key to erase the data.
4017P108EA

Useful Tip
To change the number of copies to be made,
press the Clear key and set the new number.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-1

Chapter 4

Typical Function Combinations

Chapter 4

Typical Function Combinations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-2

1. Making Different Types of Copy


These pages explain how to combine different functions to make various types of copy.

Reading the Table


1

Intended Type of Copy

Loading the
Originals

Copy

Finishing
Functions

Turn page

DoubleSided

Margin

7
File
Margin

8
Select
Position

Corner
Staple

Turn page

Hole punch

2
3

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

DoubleSided

2-Point
Staple

Shows whether the copy is 1-sided or 2-sided.


Shows what type of copy you want to make.
Shows how to load your original. p.2-26
Shows which to set, either Single-Sided, Double-Sided, 2in1, or 4in1 for Original Copy. p.3-31
Shows which to set, either Corner Staple, 2-Point Staple, or Hole-Punch for the finishing function.
p.3-18
6. Shows the margin position to be set for your original. p.3-36
7. Shows the file margin function to be set as an auxiliary function. p.3-54
8. Shows that the stapling position or hole punch positions must be set using the Select Position key.
p.3-22, p.3-24
* The marker - in the table indicates that no key setting is necessary.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Typical Function Combinations

Chapter 4

2-Sided

4-3
1. Making Different Types of Copy

Using 1-Sided Originals


Making 1-Sided Copies from 1-Sided Originals

Turn page

Copy

SingleSided

SingleSided

Finishing
Functions

Turn page

SingleSided

Turn page

1-Sided

Turn page

Turn page

SingleSided

SingleSided

2-Point
Staple

2-Point
Staple

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

Turn page

SingleSided

2-Point
Staple

Turn page

Hole punch

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SingleSided

Select
Position

Corner
Staple

Hole punch
SingleSided

File
Margin

Corner
Staple

Hole punch

Margin

2-Point
Staple

Chapter 4

Loading the
Originals

Typical Function Combinations

Turn page

Intended Type of Copy

4-4
1. Making Different Types of Copy

Intended Type of Copy

34

Turn page

12

Turn page

12

34

Loading the
Originals

Copy

Single[2in1]

Single[2in1]

Finishing
Functions

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

Turn page

Chapter 4

2-Point
Staple
Hole punch

Turn page

12
1-Sided

34

Single[2in1]

3
4

Single[2in1]

Turn page

1
2

1
2

Turn page

Typical Function Combinations

Single[2in1]

Single[2in1]

3
4

2-Point
Staple

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

3
4

Turn page

1
2

Single[2in1]

2-Point
Staple

Turn page

Hole punch

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Single[2in1]

2-Point
Staple

Margin

File
Margin

Select
Position

4-5
1. Making Different Types of Copy

Intended Type of Copy

5 6

Turn page

1 2

1 2
3 4

7 8

Turn page

3 4

Loading the
Originals

Copy

Single[4in1]

Single[4in1]

5 6
7 8

Finishing
Functions

Margin

File
Margin

Select
Position

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple

3 4

7 8

Single[4in1]

2-Point
Staple
Hole punch

5 6
7 8

1 2
3 4

Turn page

1 2
3 4

Turn page

1-Sided

Turn page

Single[4in1]

5 6
7 8

Single[4in1]

Single[4in1]

2-Point
Staple

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

Turn page

Single[4in1]

2-Point
Staple

1 2
3 4

Turn page

Hole punch
5 6
7 8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Single[4in1]

2-Point
Staple

Typical Function Combinations

5 6

Turn page

1 2

Chapter 4

Hole punch

4-6
1. Making Different Types of Copy

Making 2-Sided Copies from 1-Sided Originals


Intended Type of Copy

2 3

Turn page

Turn page

Loading the
Originals

Copy

DoubleSided

DoubleSided

Finishing
Functions

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple

2 3

Turn page

Chapter 4

Hole punch
DoubleSided

2-Point
Staple

DoubleSided

Turn page

2-Sided

Turn page

Typical Function Combinations

Hole punch

Turn page

3
2
3

DoubleSided

DoubleSided

2-Point
Staple

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

Turn page

Turn page

DoubleSided

2
3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-Point
Staple
Hole punch

DoubleSided

2-Point
Staple

Margin

File
Margin

Select
Position

4-7
1. Making Different Types of Copy

Intended Type of Copy

34 56

Turn page

12

34
Turn page

12

56

Loading the
Originals

Copy

Double[2in1]

Double[2in1]

Finishing
Functions

Margin

File
Margin

Select
Position

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple

34
2-Sided

Turn page

12

3
4

Turn page

1
2

5
6
3
4
5
6

Turn page

1
2

56

2-Point
Staple
Hole punch

Double[2in1]

Double[2in1]

Double[2in1]

2-Point
Staple

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

3
4

Turn page

1
2

5
6

Double[2in1]

2-Point
Staple

Turn page

Hole punch

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Double[2in1]

2-Point
Staple

Typical Function Combinations

Turn page

Double[2in1]

Chapter 4

Hole punch

4-8
1. Making Different Types of Copy

Intended Type of Copy

5 6 9 10
7 8 11 12

Turn page

1 2
3 4

Loading the
Originals

Copy

Double[4in1]

Finishing
Functions

Corner
Staple

5 6

1 2
3 4

Turn page

7 8

Double[4in1]

9 10
11 12

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

5 6 9 10
7 8 11 12

Turn page

3 4

Double[4in1]

2-Point
Staple
Hole punch

Double[4in1]

Turn page
Turn page

1 2
3 4

1 2
3 4

5
7

Turn page

2-Sided

Typical Function Combinations

Chapter 4

1 2

6
8

9 10
11 12

5
7
9
11

6
8
10
12

Double[4in1]

Double[4in1]

2-Point
Staple

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

1 2
3 4

Turn page

Turn page

Double[4in1]

5
7
9
11

6
8
10
12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-Point
Staple
Hole punch

Double[4in1]

2-Point
Staple

Margin

File
Margin

Select
Position

4-9
1. Making Different Types of Copy

Using 2-Sided Originals with Filing Margin along Left Edges


Making 1-Sided Copies from 2-Sided Originals with Filing Margin along Left Edges

Turn page

Copy

SingleSided

SingleSided

Finishing
Functions

Turn page

SingleSided

Turn page

1-Sided

Turn page

Turn page

SingleSided

SingleSided

2-Point
Staple

2-Point
Staple

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

Turn page

SingleSided

2-Point
Staple

Turn page

Hole punch

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SingleSided

Select
Position

Corner
Staple

Hole punch
SingleSided

File
Margin

Corner
Staple

Hole punch

Margin

2-Point
Staple

Chapter 4

Loading the
Originals

Typical Function Combinations

Turn page

Intended Type of Copy

4-10
1. Making Different Types of Copy

Intended Type of Copy

34

Turn page

12

Turn page

12

34

Loading the
Originals

Copy

Single[2in1]

Single[2in1]

Finishing
Functions

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

Turn page

Chapter 4

2-Point
Staple
Hole punch

Turn page

12
1-Sided

34

3
4

Turn page

1
2

1
2

Turn page

Typical Function Combinations

Single[2in1]

Single[2in1]

Single[2in1]

Single[2in1]

3
4

2-Point
Staple

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

3
4

Turn page

1
2

Single[2in1]

2-Point
Staple

Turn page

Hole punch

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Single[2in1]

2-Point
Staple

Margin

File
Margin

Select
Position

4-11
1. Making Different Types of Copy

Intended Type of Copy

5 6

Turn page

1 2
3 4

Turn page

1 2

7 8

3 4

Loading the
Originals

Copy

Single[4in1]

Single[4in1]

5 6
7 8

Finishing
Functions

Margin

File
Margin

Select
Position

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple

3 4

7 8

Single[4in1]

2-Point
Staple
Hole punch

5 6
7 8

1 2
3 4

Turn page

1 2
3 4

Turn page

1-Sided

Turn page

Single[4in1]

5 6
7 8

Single[4in1]

Single[4in1]

2-Point
Staple

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

Turn page

Single[4in1]

2-Point
Staple

1 2
3 4

Turn page

Hole punch
5 6
7 8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Single[4in1]

2-Point
Staple

Typical Function Combinations

5 6

Turn page

1 2

Chapter 4

Hole punch

4-12
1. Making Different Types of Copy

Making 2-Sided Copies from 2-Sided Originals with Filing Margin along Left Edges
Intended Type of Copy

2 3

Turn page

Turn page

Loading the
Originals

Copy

DoubleSided

DoubleSided

Finishing
Functions

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple

2 3

Turn page

Chapter 4

Hole punch
DoubleSided

2-Point
Staple

DoubleSided

Turn page

2-Sided

Turn page

Typical Function Combinations

Hole punch

Turn page

3
2
3

DoubleSided

DoubleSided

2-Point
Staple

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

Turn page

Turn page

DoubleSided

2
3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-Point
Staple
Hole punch

DoubleSided

2-Point
Staple

Margin

File
Margin

Select
Position

4-13
1. Making Different Types of Copy

Intended Type of Copy

34 56

Turn page

12

34
Turn page

12

56

Loading the
Originals

Copy

Double[2in1]

Double[2in1]

Finishing
Functions

Margin

File
Margin

Select
Position

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple

2-Point
Staple
Hole punch

34
2-Sided

Turn page

12

3
4

Turn page

1
2

56

3
4
5
6

Turn page

1
2

5
6

Double[2in1]

Double[2in1]

Double[2in1]

2-Point
Staple

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple

1
2

Turn page

Hole punch

3
4

5
6

Double[2in1]

2-Point
Staple

Turn page

Hole punch

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Double[2in1]

2-Point
Staple

Typical Function Combinations

Turn page

Double[2in1]

Chapter 4

Hole punch

4-14
1. Making Different Types of Copy

Intended Type of Copy

5 6 9 10
7 8 11 12

Turn page

1 2
3 4

Loading the
Originals

Copy

Double[4in1]

Finishing
Functions

Corner
Staple

5 6

1 2
3 4

Turn page

7 8

Double[4in1]

9 10
11 12

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

5 6 9 10
7 8 11 12

Turn page

3 4

Double[4in1]

2-Point
Staple
Hole punch

Double[4in1]

Turn page

5
7

1 2
3 4

Turn page

1 2
3 4

Turn page

2-Sided

Typical Function Combinations

Chapter 4

1 2

6
8

9 10
11 12

5
7
9
11

6
8
10
12

Double[4in1]

Double[4in1]

2-Point
Staple

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

1 2
3 4

Turn page

Turn page

Double[4in1]

5
7
9
11

6
8
10
12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-Point
Staple
Hole punch

Double[4in1]

2-Point
Staple

Margin

File
Margin

Select
Position

4-15
1. Making Different Types of Copy

Using 2-Sided Originals with Filing Margin along Top Edges


Making 1-Sided Copies from 2-Sided Originals with Filing Margin along Top Edges

Copy

SingleSided

SingleSided

Finishing
Functions

Turn page

SingleSided

Turn page

1-Sided

Turn page

Turn page

SingleSided

SingleSided

2-Point
Staple

2-Point
Staple

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

Turn page

SingleSided

2-Point
Staple

Turn page

Hole punch

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SingleSided

Select
Position

Corner
Staple

Hole punch
SingleSided

File
Margin

Corner
Staple

Hole punch

Margin

2-Point
Staple

Chapter 4

Turn page

Loading the
Originals

Typical Function Combinations

Turn page

Intended Type of Copy

4-16
1. Making Different Types of Copy

Intended Type of Copy

34

Turn page

12

Turn page

12

34

Loading the
Originals

Copy

Single[2in1]

Single[2in1]

Finishing
Functions

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

Turn page

Chapter 4

2-Point
Staple

12

34

Single[2in1]

3
4

Single[2in1]

Turn page

1
2

Turn page

Hole punch

1-Sided

1
2

Turn page

Typical Function Combinations

Single[2in1]

Single[2in1]

3
4

2-Point
Staple

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

3
4

Turn page

1
2

Single[2in1]

2-Point
Staple

Turn page

Hole punch

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Single[2in1]

2-Point
Staple

Margin

File
Margin

Select
Position

4-17
1. Making Different Types of Copy

Intended Type of Copy

5 6

Turn page

1 2

1 2
3 4

7 8

Turn page

3 4

Loading the
Originals

Copy

Single[4in1]

Single[4in1]

5 6
7 8

Finishing
Functions

Margin

File
Margin

Select
Position

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple

3 4

7 8

Single[4in1]

2-Point
Staple
Hole punch

5 6
7 8

1 2
3 4

Turn page

1 2
3 4

Turn page

1-Sided

Turn page

Single[4in1]

5 6
7 8

Single[4in1]

Single[4in1]

2-Point
Staple

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

Turn page

Single[4in1]

2-Point
Staple

1 2
3 4

Turn page

Hole punch
5 6
7 8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Single[4in1]

2-Point
Staple

Typical Function Combinations

5 6

Turn page

1 2

Chapter 4

Hole punch

4-18
1. Making Different Types of Copy

Making 2-Sided Copies from 2-Sided Originals with Filing Margin along Top Edges
Intended Type of Copy

2 3

Turn page

Turn page

Loading the
Originals

Copy

DoubleSided

DoubleSided

Finishing
Functions

Margin

File
Margin

Select
Position

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple

DoubleSided

2 3

Turn page

Chapter 4

Hole punch
2-Point
Staple

DoubleSided

Turn page

2-Sided

Turn page

Typical Function Combinations

Hole punch

Turn page

3
2
3

DoubleSided

DoubleSided

2-Point
Staple

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

Turn page

DoubleSided

2-Point
Staple

Turn page

Hole punch

2
3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

DoubleSided

2-Point
Staple

4-19
1. Making Different Types of Copy

Intended Type of Copy

34 56

Turn page

12

34
Turn page

12

56

Loading the
Originals

Copy

Double[2in1]

Double[2in1]

Finishing
Functions

Margin

File
Margin

Select
Position

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple

2-Point
Staple
Hole punch

34
2-Sided

Turn page

12

3
4

Turn page

1
2

5
6

3
4
5
6

Turn page

1
2

56

Double[2in1]

Double[2in1]

Double[2in1]

2-Point
Staple

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

3
4

Turn page

1
2

5
6

Double[2in1]

2-Point
Staple

Turn page

Hole punch

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Double[2in1]

2-Point
Staple

Typical Function Combinations

Turn page

Double[2in1]

Chapter 4

Hole punch

4-20
1. Making Different Types of Copy

Intended Type of Copy

5 6 9 10
7 8 11 12

Turn page

1 2
3 4

Loading the
Originals

Copy

Double[4in1]

Finishing
Functions

Corner
Staple

5 6

1 2
3 4

Turn page

7 8

Double[4in1]

9 10
11 12

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

5 6 9 10
7 8 11 12

Turn page

3 4

Double[4in1]

2-Point
Staple
Hole punch

Double[4in1]

Turn page
Turn page

1 2
3 4

1 2
3 4

5
7

Turn page

2-Sided

Typical Function Combinations

Chapter 4

1 2

6
8

9 10
11 12

5
7
9
11

6
8
10
12

Double[4in1]

Double[4in1]

2-Point
Staple

Corner
Staple

Corner
Staple
Hole punch

Turn page

Double[4in1]

2-Point
Staple

1 2
3 4

Turn page

Hole punch
5
7
9
11

6
8
10
12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Double[4in1]

2-Point
Staple

Margin

File
Margin

Select
Position

4-21

2. Using Large-Size Originals


17 L or Legal L
Precautions When Making Copies on 11
When making copies on 1117 L or Legal L, make sure of the correct direction of the original, position
of 2-Point Staple, and position of Hole-Punch.

Chapter 4

as one of your steps to specify the Original

4015O220AA

NOTE
The [Original Direction] key is invalid when the Automatic Document Feeder is used.

7 8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1 2
3 4

5 6
7 8

1 2
3 4

3
4

5 6
7 8

5
6

9 10
1112

Turn page

2
3
34

12

Turn page

Turn page

34

1
2

Turn page

Turn page

2 3

56

5 6
7 8
1 2
3 4

Turn page

5 6

12

Turn page

3
4

Turn page

3 4

Turn page

1 2

Turn page

1
2

Turn page

Turn page

When making copies on 1117 L or Legal L, 2-Point Staple or Hole Punch cannot be made in any of the
following positions.

9 10
11 12
1155O882EA

Typical Function Combinations

If you load your original as shown below, select


Direction. p.3-35

4-22

Typical Function Combinations

Chapter 4

2. Using Large-Size Originals

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5-1

Chapter 5

Using the Facsimile

Chapter 5

Using the Facsimile

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5-2

1. Using the Facsimile


Basic Faxing Procedures
Quick Memory Transmission is the most basic faxing procedure you will use. p.5-4
Place the original in position (step 2), set for image quality, contrast, and reduction (steps 3 to 5), specify
the destination (step 6), and press the Start key (step 7). This will allow you to send the document by
facsimile.
The appropriate selections
you make on the Touch Panel ensure that the other party will receive
your document in better conditions according to the specific characteristics of the document and
receiving machine.
1.

Press the Fax/Scan key to display the Fax screen.


* The Auto-Mode Screen may be used for Quick Memory Transmission.

4015O247CA

Using the Facsimile

Chapter 5

2.

Place the document.


Load the document in the
Document Feeder. p.2-27

4016P251CA

Raise the Original Cover and place the document


face down on the Original Glass. p.2-30

1166O038AB
1166O042AC

Selecting Quality according to the


original
Selecting Contrast according to
the original
Selecting Reduction/Areas
according to the paper size on the
receiving end.

Selecting Quality & Reduction.


3. Touch [Quality]. p.5-9
4. Touch [Contrast]. p.5-10
5. Touch [Reduction/Areas].
p.5-12, 5-14
4016P252CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5-3

Specify the destination.


10-Key Dialing: Enter the facsimile number of the destination. p.5-4
One-Touch Dialing: Touch the one-touch key corresponding to the destination. p.5-6
Abbreviated Dialing: Enter the abbreviated dialing number preprogrammed for the destination.
p.5-7
Facsimile Program Dialing: Touch the facsimile program key in which the destination and the
transmission functions have previously been programmed. p.5-8
Chain Dialing: Touch a one-touch dialing key in combination with others to set a single
destination. p.5-16
* Set the communication mode as may be necessary depending on the fax machine of the
receiving party. p.5-18
* If you have made a wrong setting, press the Clear key and then make the correct setting.

7.

Press the Start key.


When you press the Start key, the machine will start
transmitting the document.
* You can make sure that the destination youve set is
correct while the document is being sent or put in a
queue for transmission. p.2-33
* To stop transmission in mid-operation, press the
Stop key. Quitting an Operation p.2-37

1166O244EA

The machine emits a beep as it completes transmitting the document successfully.


If the document has not been successfully transmitted, the machine prints a transmission report.
p.5-19, 9-32
Useful Tip
The number of document pages the machine can scan and store in memory is about 400 for Di200f and
about 1,400 for Di251f/Di351f based on Letter standard pages with a normal contrast. If optional
Memory is mounted, it expands this storage capacity.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Using the Facsimile

6.

Chapter 5

1. Using the Facsimile

5-4

2. Sending Documents
Quick Memory Transmission
Quick Memory Transmission sends a document by quickly scanning and storing it in memory. You can
start to send the next document even while the previous one is being sent. The scanned documents can be
retrieved immediately, so there is no need to wait for them to be transmitted in front of the machine.

Though the Original Glass

1
2

Place the document on the Original Glass.

Touch [10-Key Dialing].

To scan two or more documents, place the


next document on the Original Glass and,
with [Restart Scan] left highlighted, press the
Start key to repeat the scanning sequence.

4016P254CA

Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the fax number


of the destination.

When all the documents to be transmitted


have been scanned, touch [Scan End].

Using the Facsimile

Chapter 5

4017P253EA

1166O030AA
4016P255CA

Useful Tip
If a wrong number has been entered, press the
Clear key and then enter the correct one.

Press the Start key.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Press the Start key.

5-5
2. Sending Documents

Using the Document Feeder

1
2

Load the document in the document feeder.

Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the fax number


of the destination.

Using Direct Dialing to Communicate


with Overseas Destinations
If the country code and destination number are
entered after the international code, you may hear
a busy tone during dialing and transmission may
not be possible.
In such cases, press the Pause key twice after
entering the international code to insert an
approx.-6-second pause, and then enter the rest of
the number. If this still fails to connect the call,
perform manual transmission. p.6-4

Touch [10-Key Dialing].

Chapter 5

4017P253EA

Useful Tip
If a wrong number has been entered, press the
Clear key and then enter the correct one.

Press the Start key.

NOTES
To quit transmission, press the Stop key.
If memory is full, wait some while before
retrying transmission.
Useful Tip
If the transmission has been unsuccessful, the
particular document is left in memory so it can
later be retransmitted. The document data can
still be erased to allow for more space in
memory. p.5-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Using the Facsimile

1166O030AA

5-6
2. Sending Documents

Using One-Touch Dialing for Transmission


If a destination number has been previously programmed for one-touch dialing, simply touching the
corresponding one-touch key can set that particular number for transmission. p.8-16
Its a good idea to group one-touch keys into different categories using the index keys, which will help
you locate easily the target one-touch dialing key. p.8-22

Using One-Touch Key for Transmission


Load the document.
Touch [One-Touch].
Touch the one-touch key of the destination.

Using the Facsimile

Chapter 5

1
2
3

4016P251CA

Useful Tips
If you have touched a wrong one-touch key,
touch the same key a second time: This will
cancel the setting.
To select multiple destinations, touch all onetouch keys of the desired destinations.
Touch the appropriate index tab, [], [], or
[Index List] to quickly access the desired onetouch key.

Press the Start key.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5-7
2. Sending Documents

Using Abbreviated Dialing for Transmission


If a destination number has been previously programmed for abbreviated dialing, that destination can be
set for transmission by simply specifying the abbreviated number.

Using Abbreviated Number for Transmission

1
2

Load the document.

Touch [Abbr. #] and enter the 3-digit


abbreviated number from the 10-Key Pad.
Or, simply touch the desired abbreviated
number key.

Touch [Abbr. #].

Using the Facsimile

Chapter 5

4016P256CA

4016P257CA

Useful Tips
An abbreviated number can range between 000
and 499.
Use any key from [#000] to [#400] and [] and
[] to reach the desired abbreviated number.
If you have touched a wrong abbreviated
number key, touch the same key a second time:
This will cancel the setting.
To set multiple destinations, repeat step 3.

Press the Start key.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5-8
2. Sending Documents

Using Facsimile Program for Transmission


If you use the Facsimile Program key to program, in advance, the various functions that can be used for
facsimile transmission (e.g., Image Quality setting and 2in1 transmission) together with information on a
specific destination, you have only to touch that key to start transmission; theres no need to make
communications functions each time. p.8-23

Using Facsimile Program for Transmission


Load the document.

Check the settings made on the screen. If


they are okay, press the Start key.

Touch [One-Touch].

4016P259CA
4016P251CA

Touch the facsimile program key to be used.

Using the Facsimile

Chapter 5

1
2

4016P258CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

NOTE
If timer transmission has been programmed, the
document is stored in memory and transmission
will start at the specified time.
Useful Tips
Touch the appropriate index tab, [], [], or
[Index List] to quickly access the desired
facsimile program key.
It is possible to set up multiple transmission by
programming multiple recipients in a single
facsimile program key.
It is also possible to set up a transmission to be
sent at the same time every day by
programming the transmission time.

5-9
2. Sending Documents

Adjusting Facsimile Image Quality


Documents to be transmitted may include very fine print, detailed drawings, and photographs. Selecting
the appropriate Image Quality according to the document type ensures that the destination receives a
faxed document with clear-cut image.
<Selecting Image Quality to Suit Document Type>
Normal sized characters (handwriting, etc.)
Fine print (newspaper, etc.) or detailed drawings
Halftone (photos, etc.) and text
Halftone (photos, etc.)

: [Standard]
: [Fine], [Super Fine]
: [Text + Photo]
: [GSR], [Super GSR]

Load the document.

Touch [Quality] and select the appropriate


Image Quality according to the document
type.

Touch [Quality & Reduction].

4016P252CA

NOTES
If the fax machine on the destination side does
not support Super Fine, Super GSR, or Text +
Photo, the document will be transmitted in Fine
or GSR.
When GSR, Super GSR, or Text + Photo is
selected, image quality may be degraded
depending on the capacity of the fax machine
on the destination side, and whether the
document size is greater than the paper size set
in the fax machine on the destination.
Stripes may occur across the photo part on the
faxed document received if the document
containing photos is transmitted in Text +
Photo. This does not, however, represent any
problem. Nonetheless, if the stripes are too
distinctive, use GSR or Super GSR.

4
5

4016P260CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Set the destination.


Press the Start key.

Using the Facsimile

1
2

Chapter 5

Selecting Image Quality

5-10
2. Sending Documents

Adjusting Facsimile Contrast


Contrast may be adjusted to vary in five steps according to the image density of the characters and
darkness of the paper.
For example, if the characters are printed on colored paper, adjust contrast to ensure that the characters
will be legible on the document received by facsimile.
<Adjusting Contrast According to Document Type>
Dark colored paper (newspaper, blueprints, etc.): [Lighter]
Normal documents
: [Normal]
Faint or colored print
: [Darker]

Adjusting Contrast

1
2

Load the document.

Touch [Contrast] and select the appropriate


contrast level according to the document
type.

4
5

Chapter 5

Touch [Quality & Reduction].

Using the Facsimile

4016P252CA

4016P261CA

Useful Tip
The transmitted document gets lighter each time
[Lighter] is touched and gets darker each time
[Darker] is touched.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Set the destination.


Press the Start key.

5-11

Using the Facsimile

Chapter 5

2. Sending Documents

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5-12
2. Sending Documents

Adjusting Facsimile Reduction


Reduction can be adjusted according to the paper size on the receiving side.
A document is normally sent in its original size, but it is automatically reduced as may be necessary to the
paper size of the recipients fax machine (Auto Size).
If automatic size reduction is not required or the document must be sent in its original size, select the nonreduction function (No Reduction). Then, only the area of the scanned document that matches the paper
size of the recipients fax machine will be sent.
Transmitter
Recipient
Auto Size

1166O203AA

Ledger L (1117 L)

Letter L
Recipient

Using the Facsimile

Chapter 5

Transmitter

No Reduction

Letter L

Ledger L (1117 L)

1166O204AE

NOTES
After transmission, the document may be reduced in size when printed depending on the model of the
fax machine at the destination.
When an Ledger L (1117 L) or Legal L document is sent, it is automatically reduced to match the paper
size at the destination. To send an Ledger L (1117 L) or Legal L document in its original size, select No
Reduction.
Document Size
Recipients Paper Size

Ledger L (1117 L)

Legal L

Ledger L (1117 L)

Original Size

Original Size

Legal L

Reduced to Legal L

Original Size

Letter L

Reduced to Letter L

Reduced to Letter L

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5-13
2. Sending Documents

Selecting Auto Size

Selecting No Reduction

1
2

Load the document.

1
2

Load the document.

Touch [Reduction/Area] and then


[Reduction].

Touch [Reduction/Area] and then


[Reduction].

Touch [Auto Size] and then [Enter].

Touch [No Reduction] and then [Enter].

Touch [Quality & Reduction].

Touch [Quality & Reduction].

4016P260CA

4016P262CA

4016P262CA

4016P263CA

5
6

Set the destination.


Press the Start key.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4016P264CA

5
6

Set the destination.


Press the Start key.

Using the Facsimile

Chapter 5

4016P260CA

5-14
2. Sending Documents

Defining the Area of Document to be Scanned for Transmission


A specific area of the document to be scanned may be defined for transmission.
This comes in handy for such needs as sending only part of a large document or sending a document of a
nonstandard size in a standard size (Letter, Legal L, etc.).

Selecting the Scanning Area

1
2

Load the document.

Select the size of the scanning area of the


document.

Touch [Quality & Reduction].

Touch [Reduction/Area].

Using the Facsimile

Chapter 5

4017P267EA
4016P260CA

NOTES
When [Auto Detect.] is touched, the machine
will automatically set the scanning area to a
standard size according to the document size.
When the document is placed manually on the
Original Glass, specify the size by referring to
the markings made on the Original Scales of
the Original Glass.

4016P265CA

Touch [Scan Area].

4015O268EA

Example: Letter L

6
7
4016P266CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Set the destination.


Press the Start key.

5-15
2. Sending Documents

<For an Metric-Size Document>


On the screen given in step 5, touch [Metric], and a
screen will appear allowing you to select an
metric-size document.

4017P268EA

Using the Facsimile

Chapter 5

Useful Tip
Touching [Inch] will bring you back to the
screen, on which Letter, Legal, and other inch
sizes can be selected.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5-16
2. Sending Documents

Chain Dialing
Multiple one-touch keys can be used together to call a single destination. This is called the Chain Dialing
function. For example, preprogrammed switchboard and extension numbers for a single destination on
different one-touch keys can be combined for dialing.
Chain Dialing is possible by using 10-Key Dialing or Abbreviated Dialing in combination with a onetouch key.
* Numbers up to 192 digits long can be dialed when Chain Dialing is used for transmission. (Numbers up
to 64 digits long are displayed on the Touch Panel.)
Load the document.

Touch [Chain Dial].

Set the destination.


<Using one-touch keys>
Touch [One-Touch] and then touch the
corresponding one-touch key.

4016P269CA

Useful Tip
The default fax screen appears that has been set
with Priority FAX Screen. p.9-19

Using the Facsimile

Chapter 5

1
2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4016P270CB

Useful Tips
To check the details, touch [10-Key Dialing]
and move the cursor to
using [] or []
key. Then, the number programmed in that
particular one-touch key is displayed.

is displayed when a one-touch key is


touched.
To continue the number, touch another onetouch key to set the next part of the number.

5-17
2. Sending Documents

<Using Abbreviated Dialing>


Touch the [Abbr. #] tab and then touch the
corresponding Abbreviated Dialing number key.
Or, touch the [Abbr. #] key on the bottom of the
screen and, from the 10-Key Pad, enter the
abbreviated number.

<Using 10-Key Dialing>


Touch [10-Key Dialing] and, from the 10-Key Pad,
enter the number.

4017P272EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Press the Start key.


Chapter 5

Useful Tips
To check the details, touch [10-Key Dialing]
and move the cursor to
using [] or []
key. Then, the number programmed in the
selected Abbreviated Numbering key is
displayed.

is displayed when an Abbreviated


Numbering key is touched or an abbreviated
number is entered.
To continue the number, touch another
Abbreviated Numbering key or enter numerals
to set the next part of the number.

Using the Facsimile

4016P271CB

Useful Tip
To correct a numeral, use [] or [] to move
the cursor to that numeral and touch [Delete] to
erase that particular numeral. Or, press the
Clear key to enter the correct number.

5-18
2. Sending Documents

Setting the Communication Mode


The communication mode should be set as detailed below according to the standards of the fax machine
on the receiving end and lines over which data is transmitted.
Transmitting documents to G3 fax machines over the ordinary telephone line: [G3]
<When G3 MULTIPORT SERIES 2 is mounted>
Transmitting documents to G3 fax machines over port 1 of ordinary telephone line: [G3-1]
Transmitting documents to G3 fax machines over port 2 of ordinary telephone line: [G3-2]
<When using F CODE communications>
F CODE p.6-30

Selecting the Communication Mode


Touch [10-Key Dialing].

Using the Facsimile

Chapter 5

4017P253EA

Touch [Com. Mode] and select the


appropriate mode to suit the standard of the
fax machine on the receiving end.

4016P273CA

NOTE
The setting can be made only when the optional
G3 MULTIPORT SERIES 2 is mounted.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter].

5-19
2. Sending Documents

When Transmission Fails


A transmission report will be produced if the transmission has failed because of the receiving facsimiles
being busy. This report contains a copy of part of the data on page 1 of the document which has not been
successfully sent. No copy is, however, produced in Real Time Transmission.
It is also possible to select not to print the transmission report. Settings for Report Printing p.9-33
Time and Date of Report Printing

P.1

The following document has not been transmitted. Try to retransmit.


(SUN) APR 01 2001 11:15
CHICAGO

USER NAME

:SALES

DESTINATION

:NEW YORK

DEST. TEL#
F CODE

:123451234
:12345

PAGES
RESULT

:0 sheets
:BUSY

TSI

DOCUMENT#
TIME STORED

:6314316-761
:MAR 30 16:50

TIME SENT

:APR 01 11:10

DURATION
MODE

:
:

Description of
Transmission

Chapter 5

IMAGE

Display
BUSY
NO ANS
INTERR
F. MEM
NG
PT. DEL

Description of Communication Results

The recipient is busy.


Line is busy.
The recipient is unable to receive transmission.
The recipient does not answer the telephone.
Communication is suspended.
Memory is full.
All transmissions fail.
Some transmissions fail.

Useful Tip
The documents which have not been transmitted successfully can be retransmitted. p.5-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Using the Facsimile

4015O269CB

5-20

3. Receiving Documents
Automatic Reception and Manual Reception
If the machine is set in the automatic reception mode, documents can be received automatically without
performing special operations. p.9-24
If it is in the manual reception mode, the document can be received only after the handset is lifted to
accept the call. p.6-28

On Receiving Documents

Using the Facsimile

Chapter 5

Selecting the reception mode:


FAX Recept (Reception) Settings p.9-24
While a document is being received:
The Touch Panel displays the receiving indicator. p.2-24
The machine beeps when it completes receiving the document.
For details, see Using Activity List. p.5-24
When paper runs out:
The Touch Panel displays an alarm to indicate the lack of paper and the no paper lamp on the paper
drawer lights up orange.
The lamp starts blinking orange when paper is running low (except for the Large Capacity Cabinet).
The received document is stored in memory and is automatically printed as soon as paper of the
appropriate size is loaded.
If memory becomes full during reception, the remaining pages of the document cannot be received.
Once memory is full, no further documents can be received.
Paper Sizes and Reception Features
The sizes of documents that can be received are Letter to 1117L.
If the machine is not loaded with paper of the same size as the document received, it uses paper of a
size larger than the document or automatically reduces the document image. FAX Recept
(Reception) Settings p.9-24
A received document cannot be printed on paper fed via the Manual Bypass Tray.
When Letter size document are received, they are automatically rotated by 90 and can be printed
even though the documents were inserted in a different derection to the paper (Rotation Print). FAX
Recept (Reception) Settings p.9-24
The paper drawer designated for special paper is not used for facsimile reception. Special Paper
Setting p.3-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5-21
3. Receiving Documents

When a long document is received:


When a document is received that is longer in the length direction than the standard sizes (Letter L,
Ledger L, etc.), the image on the document is automatically reduced so that it fits properly in a single
sheet of paper.

Reduction

Print Paper
Received Document

Using the Facsimile

If the received document is too long to be printed on a single sheet of paper even when reduced by up to
60%, the image is divided and printed on more than one sheet of paper. In this case, the joint area
(where the image is divided) will be printed on both sheets of paper. If paper of a larger size is loaded in
the machine, however, the image will be printed on this paper without being divided. The maximum
reduction ratio can be changed. It is also possible to cut off the excess image when printing.
FAX Recept (Reception) Settings p.9-24

Chapter 5

4015O232AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5-22

4. Using Facsimile as Telephone


Using Your Fax Machine as a Telephone
This machine can be used to make and receive telephone calls. Pushbutton services are available even if
the machine uses a pulse dialing line.
NOTE
An extra telephone set is required to use the telephone function.

Making a Telephone Call

Pick up the handset.

Select the number to dial.


You will hear ringing tone.

NOTE
Make sure that you hear dial tone from the
handset.

Using the Facsimile

Chapter 5

4015O270CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4016P277CA

Useful Tips
Various pushbutton services are available even
if the machine uses a pulse dialing line.
When [Tone] is touched after calling the
destination, tone dialing line (PB) signals can
be sent.
The destination can be selected with [Abbr. #]
or [10-Key Dialing].

When the called party answers, respond in


normal manner.

5-23
4. Using Facsimile as Telephone

Making a Telephone Call without Lifting Handset

Touch [One-Touch] and then [On-hook


Dial].

Receiving a Telephone Call

Pick up the handset when your fax machine


rings.

NOTE
If you are expecting a telephone call, change the
setting to manual reception in advance.
FAX Recept (Reception) Settings p.9-24

4016P278CA

Useful Tip
The call can also be made using [Abbr. #] or [10Key Dialing].

Select the destination.


When you hear your call being answered,
pick up the handset and talk in normal
manner.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Using the Facsimile

2
3

Chapter 5

NOTE
Make sure that you hear dial tone from the
monitor speaker. p.7-17

5-24

5. Using Activity List


Activity List
The machine keeps a record of communication results, including the status of documents that await
transmission, are being transmitted, and that have been transmitted, as well as the documents received.
The Activity List is available on the Touch Panel, allowing you to check the status of these
communications.
* The results of communication made can be checked with Activity List.

4016P192CA

Using the Facsimile

Chapter 5

Specific Items That Can be Checked with Activity List


Status

RX

Shows active functions.

Shows the documents that are being received,


queuing up for printing, and that have been
received. Up to 200 documents that are either
being received or waiting to be printed, and a
maximum of 256 received documents, can be
displayed.

Bultn. (Bulletin Board)


Shows documents that have been posted on the
bulletin board. Such documents can be printed or
deleted.

TX
Shows documents that are being transmitted, those
stored and awaiting transmission, and those that
have been transmitted. Up to 64 documents that
are either being transmitted or saved for
transmission, and a maximum of 96 transmitted
documents, can be displayed.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Box
Shows the documents stored in the box set up for
each account. These documents can be printed or
deleted.

5-25
5. Using Activity List

Selecting a Function Available from Activity List


Confirming Active Functions (Status)

Touch [Activity List].

Touch [Status] and check the active function.

Checking Documents on Bulletin


Board (Bultn.)

Touch [Activity List].

Touch [Bultn.].

4016P192CA

Chapter 5

4016P192CA

Useful Tip
Up to four functions are displayed at a time. If
the one you are looking for is not displayed,
check further by touching [] or [].

Touch the status key of your choice, check


the details, and then touch [Exit].

4016P195CA

Useful Tip
Touch [] or [] to search through documents
for the desired one.

Touch the number key of your choice, check


the details, and then touch [Enter].

4016P196CB

4016P194CB

Touch [Exit].

Useful Tip
Touch [Print] to print the document or [Delete]
to delete it.

4 Touch [Exit].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Using the Facsimile

4016P193CB

5-26
5. Using Activity List

Confirming Transmission Status (TX)

Checking Reception Status (RX)

Touch [Activity List].

Touch [Activity List].

Touch [TX] and check the results of


transmission.

Touch [RX] and check the results of


reception.

4016P192CA

Chapter 5

4016P192CA

Using the Facsimile

4016P197CB

Useful Tips
Touch [] or [] to search through documents
for the desired one and check the transmission
status.
If you want to retry transmission of a document
that has not been successfully transmitted,
touch [] or [] to search for that particular
document. If [Retry] or [Dest. Chng] is
displayed, touching [Retry] will let the machine
transmit the document to the same destination;
touching [Dest. Chng] will allow you to change
the destination and send the document to the
new destination without having to reload the
document.
If [Interim Rep.] is touched during broadcast
transmission, an interim report of transmission
status will be printed.
If [Delete] is being displayed, touching that key
will delete the document awaiting transmission.
If Timer Transmission has been set,
appears to the right of the setting of time and
date accepted (Time Stored).

Touch [Exit].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4016P198CB

Useful Tips
Touch [] or [] to search through documents
for the desired one and check the reception
status.
Touching [Retry] when Polling Reception has
been set will immediately let the machine start
redialing.
To delete a document, touch [Delete].

Touch [Exit].

5-27
5. Using Activity List

Checking Documents Stored in Box


(Box)

Touch [Activity List].

Touch [Box] and check the documents stored


in the box.

Chapter 5

4016P192CA

Touch [Exit].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Using the Facsimile

4016P199CC

Useful Tips
Touch [] or [] to search through documents
to check one.
To print a document, touch [Print].
To delete a document, touch [Delete].
To transfer a document, touch [Forwrd].

5-28

Using the Facsimile

Chapter 5

5. Using Activity List

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6-1

Chapter 6

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6-2

1.Various Ways of Transmitting Documents


Serial Broadcast Transmission
Serial broadcast transmission allows you to send a document to multiple destinations all at the same time.
* Up to 210 destinations can be selected simultaneously for each transmission. Only up to 12 can,
however, be specified if the 10-Key Pad is used to set the destination numbers.
Useful Tip
TX Report can be used to make sure that the document has been successfully transmitted to all
destinations. Settings for Report Settings p.9-32

Using One-Touch Keys

Using Abbreviated Dialing Keys

1
2

1
2

Load the document.


Touch [One-Touch] and select the one-touch
keys of all destinations to which you want to
send the document.

Load the document.


Touch [Abbr. #] and select the abbreviated
number keys of all destinations to which you
want to send the document.

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

4016P280CA

4016P281CA

NOTE
The destination numbers must be previously
programmed for one-touch dialing to use this
function. p.8-16

Press the Start key.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

NOTE
The destination numbers must be previously
programmed for abbreviated dialing to use this
function. p.8-10
]

Press the Start key.

6-3
1.Various Ways of Transmitting Documents

Using 10-Key Dialing

Using Facsimile Program

1
2

1
2

Load the document.


Touch [10-Key Dialing]. Then, using the 10Key Pad, enter the fax number of one
destination.

Load the document.


Touch [One-Touch] and then touch the
facsimile program key to be used.

4016P258CA

Touch [Add Dest.].

NOTE
To use this function, you must program, in
advance, the various functions to be used in a
Facsimile Program key. p.8-23

Check the settings made on the screen. If


they are okay, press the Start key.

Chapter 6

4017P282EA
]

4
5

Enter the fax number of the next destination.

Press the Start key.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the numbers of all


destinations have been entered.
4016P259CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

4017P253EA

6-4
1.Various Ways of Transmitting Documents

Manual Transmission
After talking with the destination, you can send a document without hanging up or redialing the number.
This function can be used when you want to inform the destination that a document is to be transmitted.
NOTES
When Automatic Reception is selected on the recipients fax machine, a beep is heard immediately
instead of the phone being answered. In this case, you cannot speak to the recipient.
Use the Document Feed Tray of the document feeder for transmission after talking on the telephone.
An extra telephone set is required for Manual Transmission.

Load the document in the Document Feed


Tray.

Pick up the handset.

Touch [One-Touch] and set the destination.

4016P277CA

4015O270CA

After talking, get the recipient to press the


Start key on their machine. A beep is heard
as soon as the recipients fax machine is
ready to receive transmission.

5
6

Press the Start key.

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

NOTE
Make sure that you hear dial tone through the
handset.

Useful Tip
Abbreviated Dialing or 10-Key Dialing can also
be used to select the destination. p.5-4, 5-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Hang up the handset.

Useful Tip
If the handsets at both the receiving and sending
ends are left off the hook, you can continue
talking with the recipient after transmission.

6-5
1.Various Ways of Transmitting Documents

Relay Transmission
Your fax machine (acting as an originating station) can send a document first to another fax machine
(acting as a relay station), which in turn sends the document to multiple destinations (acting as receiving
stations). When you need to send documents to distant recipients, using fax machines closer to the distant
recipients as the relay stations reduces the number of transmissions and the communication cost at your
end. Up to five relay stations and up to five groups of receiving stations can be specified.

Originating Station
Relay Stations

NOTES
Not all fax machine models can be used as relay station, but, this machine can be specified for it.
If this product is used as a relay station, Relay Transmission is possible for up to a total of 210
receiving stations is selected groups.
Relay Transmission and Password Transmission cannot be used simultaneously.
One-touch keys are used to set destinations for Relay Transmission. The relay stations and receiving
stations (final destinations) must be programmed in Facsimile Program keys to use this function.
p.8-30
A local abbreviated dialing number (of self-telephone number) must be programmed in your fax
machine to receive a relay status report from a relay station. p.8-34
To specify receiving stations, relay group numbers that have been programmed in the relay stations are
used. Relay group numbers should therefore be programmed in advance. p.8-33
An abbreviated dialing number of the originating station must be programmed in the relay stations
before they can send a relay status report to the originating station.
Documents can be printed at the relay stations. p.9-29

1
2

Load the document.


Touch the Facsimile Program key in which
the relay program has been programmed.

Useful Tip
Here is how to use the index: touch the
appropriate index tab, [], [], or [Index List]
to quickly access the desired facsimile program
key.

4016P491CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Press the Start key.

Chapter 6

4015O245AA

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Receiving Stations

6-6
1.Various Ways of Transmitting Documents

Real Time Transmission


You can use the Real Time Transmission function to send a document one page at a time in accordance
with the transmission status. This function can be used to ensure accurate transmission of a large number
of documents.

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

NOTES
Use the Document Feed Tray of the Automatic Document Feeder for Real Time Transmission. Neither
the Duplexing Document Feeder nor the Original Glass should be used.
Real Time Transmission cannot be used while another document is being sent or received.
Only a single destination can be set at a time for Real Time Transmission.
Timer Transmission or 2-Sided Transmission cannot be used at the same time with Real Time
Transmission.

Load the document in the Document Feed


Tray.

Touch [FAX Menu] and then [Set 1].

Touch [Real-Time].

4
5

Set the destination.

4016P283CA

4016P284CA

Press the Start key.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

NOTE
Utility Mode allows you to select Real Time
Transmission as the default setting for each
account. p.8-38, 9-28

6-7
1.Various Ways of Transmitting Documents

Priority Transmission
You can transmit an urgent document while a stored document is queuing up for transmission. For
example, when the facsimile is carrying out a serial broadcast transmission for multiple destinations, you
can interrupt it to perform a priority transmission for an urgent document after the facsimile has
completed the current transmission and before it goes on to the next one.
Priority

Priority

4015O246AA

NOTES
Only one recipient can be dialed for Priority Transmission.
Timer Transmission cannot be used simultaneously with Priority Transmission.
Load the document.

Touch [Priority TX].

4
5

Set the destination.

Touch [FAX Menu] and then [Set 1].

4016P285CA

4016P283CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Press the Start key.

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

1
2

6-8
1.Various Ways of Transmitting Documents

Timer Transmission
Timer Transmission allows an automatic transmission of pre-scanned documents at a specified time. It is
useful when transmitting a document of numerous pages late at night when call charges are lower. The
24-hour clock is used to set the time. If the current time is not set accurately, the document will not be
transmitted at the right time.
* A maximum of 64 documents can be stored for Timer Transmission.
NOTE
Timer Transmission cannot be set in combination with Real Time Transmission or Priority
Transmission.

1
2

Load the document.

From the 10-Key Pad, enter the desired


transmission time. Then, touch [Enter].

Touch [FAX Menu] and then [Set 1].

4016P287CA
4016P283CA

Touch [Timer Set].

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful Tips
Touch [Hour] or [Minute] and use the 10-Key
Pad to enter the time. If a time has been entered
mistakenly, touch the Clear key and then enter
the correct one.
Touching [Cancel] will cancel the setting.

5
6
4016P286CA

Set the destination.


Press the Start key.

6-9
1.Various Ways of Transmitting Documents

2in1 Transmission
<Only when the Automatic Document Feeder is mounted>
Two pages of a document can be sent as one page with this function.
This feature is convenient when you want to send two Letter-size pages by reducing and combining them
into one Letter-size page.

4015O233AA

NOTES
Use the Document Feed Tray for 2in1 Transmission. The Original Glass is not good for this type of
transmission.
Only Letter C can be used as the document sizes for 2in1 Transmission.

Touch [FAX Menu] and then [Set 1].

Touch [2in1].

4
5

Set the destination.

Chapter 6

Load the document in the Document Feed


Tray.

4016P288CA

4016P283CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Press the Start key.

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

6-10
1.Various Ways of Transmitting Documents

2-Sided Transmission
Double-Sided documents can be transmitted.

1166O197AA

NOTES
Any document send through 2-Sided Transmission can only be printed on one side of the paper at the
recipients fax machine.
2-Sided Transmission and Real Time Transmission cannot be used simultaneously.

1
2

Load the document.

Touch [2-Sided TX].

4
5

Set the destination.

Touch [FAX Menu] and then [Set 1].

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

When Duplexing Document Feeder is


mounted

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4016P289CA

4016P346CA

Press the Start key.

6-11
1.Various Ways of Transmitting Documents

When Automatic Document Feeder is


mounted

1
2

Load the document face up in the document


feeder.

6
7

The message Scanning appears.

Press the Start key.

Place the document with its second side up.

Touch [FAX Menu] and then [Set 1].

Touch [2-Sided TX].

4
5

Set the destination.

4016P291CA

Chapter 6

4016P290CA
4016P283CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Press the Start key.

6-12
1.Various Ways of Transmitting Documents

TX Marker
<Only when TX Marker STAMP UNIT is mounted on Automatic Document Feeder>
Select the TX Marker function to make sure that each page of your document has been scanned properly.
Any page that is not marked should be retransmitted.

Document Feeding
Direction

Markers on Both Top


and Bottom Edges

Marker on Bottom Edge


1166O198AC

NOTES
Change the Spare TX Marker STAMP when the stamp gets faint. p.10-40
TX Marker cannot be used with any copying functions.
Utility Mode allows you to make the default setting for TX Marker. p.8-39, 9-28

Load the document.

Touch [TX Marker].

Touch [FAX Menu] and then [Set 1].

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

1
2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4016P292CA

4016P283CA

Useful Tips
With Real Time Transmission and Manual
Transmission, markers are stamped only on
pages that have been successfully transmitted
to the destination.
In Quick Memory Transmission, markers are
stamped only on pages that have been
successfully stored in memory.

6-13
1.Various Ways of Transmitting Documents

Select the marking position and touch


[Enter].

5
6

Set the destination.

4016P293CA

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

Press the Start key.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6-14
1.Various Ways of Transmitting Documents

TSI Information
When TSI (transmitters subscriber information) is set, the recipient receives a fax with the name of the
sender, time and date of transmission, document number, page number, and other information printed
along the leading edge of the paper.
It is also possible to print TSI uniquely programmed for each account, in addition to TSI common to the
sending fax machine.
NOTES
Time, Date, and Account TSI must be programmed in advance. p.8-2, 8-38, 9-12
Utility Mode allows you to select the location of TSI, or not to print it. p.9-28

1
2

Load the document.

Touch [TSI].

4
5

Set the destination.

Touch [FAX Menu] and then [Set 2].

4016P295DA

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

4016P294DA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Press the Start key.

6-15
1.Various Ways of Transmitting Documents

Destination Insertion
When a document is transmitted, the recipients name can be printed along with the TSI.
The recipient can thus easily make sure to whom the document is addressed.
NOTES
This function prints the recipients name as programmed in a one-touch key or as an abbreviated
dialing key. The recipients facsimile number must therefore be programmed in advance in a one-touch
key or as an abbreviated dialing key. p.8-10, 8-16
The recipients name can only be inserted when TSI is set. p.6-14, 9-28
The recipients name cannot be inserted when the number is dialed using the 10-Key Pad or included
in Chain Dialing.
The name of each recipient is printed on documents when using Serial Broadcast Transmission.

1
2

Load the document.

Touch [Dest. Insert].

4
5

Set the destination.

Touch [FAX Menu] and then [Set 2].

Press the Start key.

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

4016P295DA

Chapter 6

4017P296EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6-16
1.Various Ways of Transmitting Documents

TX Report
A transmission report can be printed using this function.
* Utility Mode allows you to make the necessary setting for TX Report. p.9-32

1
2

Load the document.


Touch [FAX Menu] and then [Set 2].

4016P295DA

Touch [TX Report].

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

4017P297EA

Useful Tip
TX Report is not highlighted if it has been set to
be printed only when the transmission is
unsuccessful.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4
5

Set the destination.


Press the Start key.

6-17
1.Various Ways of Transmitting Documents

Remote Copy
This function enables you to instruct the fax machine at the receiving end to print a specified number of
copies of the document you transmitted.
Up to 99 copies can be specified for Remote Copy.
* This function can only be used if the fax machine at the receiving end has a Remote Copy function
using F CODE.

1
2

Load the document.

From the 10-Key Pad, enter the number of


copies to be printed and then touch [Enter].

Touch [FAX Menu] and then [Set 2].

4016P299CA

Touch [Remote Copy].

5
6

4017P298EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Set the destination.


Press the Start key.

Chapter 6

NOTE
The number of copies to be printed can range
from 2 to 99.

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

4016P295DA

6-18
1.Various Ways of Transmitting Documents

Password TX
This facsimile can be set to transmit your document only when the destinations fax machine has the
same communication or group password as yours: You can use this function when you want to transmit
confidential documents only to a particular destination.
Comm. (Group)
Password: 23
Not send

Send

Comm. (Group)
Password: 12

Comm. (Group) Password: 12


Not send

Comm. (Group)
Password: 34
4015O263CA

1
2

Load the document.

Touch [Password TX].

4
5

Set the destination.

Touch [FAX Menu] and then [Set 2].

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

NOTES
It is necessary to program the communication password using Utility Mode in advance. p.9-19
Password TX may not be valid depending on the type of the fax machine on the receiving end.
Password TX may be set as the default using Utility Mode. p.9-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4017P300EA

4016P295DA

Press the Start key.

6-19

2. Using Bulletin Boards


Posting a Document on a Bulletin Board
A bulletin board with a specific theme can be set up within your fax machine to allow anyone to gain
access to documents posted on it. Those who know the password can post a document on the bulletin
board in the fax machine by accessing from another machine.
Up to ten bulletin boards can be set up, each carrying one document.
Downloading

Bulletin Board

Bulletin Board

1166O199AB

NOTES
Before posting a document on a bulletin board, the bulletin board must first be set up and F CODE
and F CODE password assigned to it. p.8-35
When a document is posted on a bulletin board from another fax machine, the F CODE and F CODE
password assigned to each bulletin board need to be specified. If the specified F CODE and F CODE
password do not match those previously assigned, the document cannot be posted on the bulletin
board. p.8-35
If a new document is posted on a bulletin board already posted with another, the older document will
be deleted and replaced by the new one.

1
2

Load the document.

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Posting a Document on a Bulletin


Board
Touch [Reg.].

Touch [FAX Menu] and then [Bultn.].

4016P302CA

4016P301CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 6

Posting a Document

6-20
2. Using Bulletin Boards

Touch the number assigned to the bulletin


board on which you want to post your
document.

Select reduction and scan area and touch


[Next].
Adjusting Facsimile Reduction p.5-12

4016P306CA

4016P303CA

Select image quality and touch [Next].


Adjusting Facsimile Image Quality p.5-9

Select the transmission function.

4017P307EA

Select contrast and touch [Next].


Adjusting Facsimile Contrast p.5-10

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

4016P304CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4016P305CA

Press the Start key.

6-21
2. Using Bulletin Boards

Posting a Document on a Bulletin


Board from Another Fax Machine
Documents cannot be posted from a fax machine
that does not offer the F CODE function. For
details, see the instruction manual of the fax
machine to be used.

1
2
3
4
5
6

Load the document.

Enter the password assigned to the bulletin


board, on which you want to post your
document, in SID/PWD.

Dial the fax number and press the Start key.

Select image quality.


Select contrast.
Select reduction and scan area.
Select the transmission function.

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

NOTE
If there is a document previously posted on the
selected bulletin board, it will be replaced by the
new one.

Chapter 6

Enter the F CODE assigned to the bulletin


board, on which you want to post your
document, in SUB.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6-22
2. Using Bulletin Boards

Downloading a Document from a Bulletin Board (Retrieve)


A document which has been posted on the bulletin board of another fax machine may be downloaded.
* Use an F CODE to select the bulletin board. Contact the other party for the F CODE that has been
assigned to each bulletin board in advance. If access to bulletin boards is password-restricted by the
other partys fax machine, you will also need to have the corresponding F CODE password.

Touch [FAX Menu].

Set the destination and touch [Next].

Useful Tip
F CODE must be assigned in advance in order to
use One-Touch Dialing or Abbreviated Dialing to
set the destination. p.8-12, 8-18

Set the reception time.

4016P283CA

Touch [Bultn.] and then [Retrieve].

4016P308CA

Select the method of setting the destination.

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

4016P310CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful Tips
Touch [Hour] or [Minute] and use the 10-Key
Pad to enter the time. If a time has been entered
mistakenly, touch the Clear key and then enter
the correct time.
If you do not set any specific reception time,
touch [No Setting].

4016P309CA

Press the Start key.

6-23
2. Using Bulletin Boards

<Using 10-Key Dialing to set the destination>


Touch [10-Key Dialing] in step 3.

Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the F CODE


assigned to the bulletin board and touch [Enter].
Using F CODE p.6-30

4017P311EA

From the 10-Key Pad, enter the fax number and


touch [F CODE].

4016P314CA

Touch [Next].
NOTE
When retrieving a document from the bulletin
board set up in this machine, see Using Activity
List. p.5-24

4017P312EA

4016P313CA

Useful Tip
If the F CODE password is to be entered, touch
[F CODE p/w (SID/PWD)] in the same way and
enter the F CODE password.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

Touch [F CODE (SEP)].

6-24

3. Using Applied Functions


Polling TX
This function allows a recipient to automatically begin transmission of documents previously stored in
the memory of your fax machine.
NOTES
The document stored in memory is deleted after transmission.
Polling Transmission cannot be used when memory is full.
Only one document can be selected for Polling Transmission. This function cannot be used if there is
another document already selected to be transmitted.
This function can be used at recipients expense.

1
2

Load the document.

Select image quality and touch [Next].

Select contrast and touch [Next].

Touch [FAX Menu] and then [Appl.].

4016P317CA

4016P315CA

Touch [Polling TX].

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4016P318CA

4016P316CA

6-25
3. Using Applied Functions

Select reduction and scan area and touch


[Next].

Select the transmission function.

Press the Start key.

4016P319CA

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

4017P320EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6-26
3. Using Applied Functions

Polling Reception and Start Timer


If Polling Reception is selected, you can retrieve a document prepared by a remote party by controlling
their fax machine. The reception time can be specified for Polling Reception. Polling Reception is
effective when used to retrieve large volumes of documents, or a document late at night when call charges
are lower particularly for long-distance polling reception.

Touch [FAX Menu].

4016P322CA

4016P283CA

Touch [Appl.] and then [Polling RX].

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4016P321CA

Select the method of setting the other party.

Select the other party and touch [Next].

4016P323CA

6-27
3. Using Applied Functions

Set the reception time.

4016P324CA

Useful Tips
Touch [Hour] or [Minute] and use the 10-Key
Pad to enter the time. If a time has been entered
mistakenly, touch the Clear key and then enter
the correct one.
If you do not set any specific reception time,
touch [No Setting].
Press the Start key.

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6-28

4. Various Ways of Receiving Documents


Manual Reception
This machine normally receives a document automatically (automatic reception), but you can also receive
a document after talking on the telephone with the sender without disconnecting the line (manual
reception). An extra telephone set is required for manual reception. And, Reception Mode should be set
to Manual using Utility Mode. p.9-24
Manual Reception is possible if the icon shown below (indicating that automatic reception is not active)
is being displayed. Your fax machine is set for Automatic Reception when the icon is not displayed.

1166P200AA
4016P329CA

When the phone rings, pick up the handset


and speak to the sender.

Hang up the handset. Reception is complete


when you hear a beep.

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

Useful Tip
You can resume talking to the sender after
reception is completed if both sides leave their
handsets off the hook.

4015O270CA

After talking, press the Start key when you


hear a tone through the handset. Reception
will starts.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6-29
4. Various Ways of Receiving Documents

Password Reception
This facsimile can be set to receive a document only when the senders fax machine has the same
communication or group password as yours. This function may be used to screen out junk facsimile mail.

Comm. (Group)
Password: 23

Not send

Send

Comm. (Group)
Password: 12

Not send
Comm. (Group) Password: 12
Comm. (Group)
Password: 34
4015O264CA

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

NOTE
It is necessary to program the communication password using Utility Mode in advance. p.9-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6-30

5. Using F CODE
What is F CODE?
This machine supports F CODE communications.
This section describes the communication functions that make use of F CODE.
F CODE provides a mailbox function using codes such as Sub-Address (SUB), Selective Polling (SEP),
and Password (PWD) defined in the G3 standard of the International Telecommunications Union (ITUT). It enables confidential transmission and bulletin board communications between fax machines that
support F CODE. To specify an F CODE, the 10-Key Pad is used as detailed below.
SID/PWD : Specified when the called fax
machine is password-protected.

SUB

: Specified when transmitting


documents using F CODE.

SEP

: Specified when retrieving a


document stored in a fax machine at
a remote location by calling up that
fax machine (Polling Reception).

NOTES
When an F CODE is entered using the 10-Key Pad, F CODE transmission can be used for only one
recipient per transmission. Note that F CODE cannot be specified for individual recipients when
documents are transmitted to multiple recipients simultaneously (Serial Broadcast Transmission).
However, if an F CODE has been programmed in a one-touch key or as an Abbreviated Dialing key in
advance, F CODE transmission to individual recipients is possible.

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

Mailbox

Mailbox

Facsimile
transmission
F CODE
203

Facsimile
transmission

F CODE F CODE F CODE


201
202
203
F CODE F CODE F CODE
102
101
103

F CODE
101

Password (Transfer) F CODE 101


for user
management ***

Printing

Facsimile reception
1166O407AA

Creating a Mailbox
A mailbox becomes available for use when an account programs an F CODE as it registers with the
system. The F CODE programmed at this stage serves as the mailbox number. p.8-38
Using the Mailbox
Depending on the settings made, documents received in the mailbox can be printed immediately after
reception or transferred to another fax machine. If the transfer function is used, the sender can be sure that
the recipient will receive the document by simply sending the document to the mailbox, even if the
recipient is out of office when the document is transmitted. p.8-38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6-31
5. Using F CODE

Confidential F CODE Transmission


Individual mailboxes are created in the fax machine by assigning an individual F CODE for each account.
A password is required to download the received document, so confidential documents can be sent
between fax machines in utmost security.
NOTES
When an F CODE is entered using the 10-Key Pad, F CODE transmission can be used for only one
destination per transmission. It is not possible to specify an F CODE for individual destination when
documents are transmitted to multiple destinations simultaneously (Serial Broadcast Transmission).
However, if an F CODE has been programmed in a one-touch key or as an Abbreviated Dialing key in
advance, F CODE transmission to individual destinations is possible.
<Performing a confidential F CODE transmission>

1
2

Load the document.

Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the F CODE and


then touch [Enter].

Set the destination.


E.g.: Touch [10-Key Dialing].

Touch [F CODE] and then [F CODE (SUB)].

4016P330CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Press the Start key.

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

4017P253EA

Chapter 6

4016P331CA

Useful Tips
When an F CODE password is required:
Select [F CODE p/w (SID/PWD)].
F CODE can be programmed in a one-touch
key or as an Abbreviated Dialing key in
advance. p.8-12, 8-18

6-32
5. Using F CODE

<Retrieving confidential F CODE documents>

Touch [Activity List].

Touch [Box] and select the target document


from among those in the list.

4016P193CB

Useful Tips
Touch [] or [] to search through documents
for the desired one.
To print the document, touch [Print].
To delete the document, touch [Delete].
To transfer the document, touch [Forwrd].

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

4016P199CC

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6-33
5. Using F CODE

Bulletin Boards
Documents can be disclosed to anyone who wants to access them by setting up a bulletin board using F
CODE. Any document on a bulletin board can be downloaded to your fax machine by simply specifying
the F CODE assigned to that particular bulletin board.
Setting up a Bulletin Board
See Setting up a Bulletin Board. p.8-35
Posting a Document on a Bulletin Board
See Posting a Document on a Bulletin Board. p.6-19
Downloading a Document from a Bulletin Board
See Downloading a Document from a Bulletin Board (Retrieve). p.6-22

Remote Multi Copies


The sender can specify the number of copies to be printed at the receiving end for a transmission.
Remote Multi Copying Procedure
Specify the F CODE (SUB) as follows.
*02*05
Specify the desired number of copies to be printed on the
receiving end.
Function code:
Specify 02 for the remote multi copying function.

Points to Note When Setting an F CODE


If the same F CODE is set for a mailbox and a bulletin board, the bulletin board takes precedence over the
mailbox; i.e., any documents that are sent to this mailbox will be posted on the bulletin board.
It is therefore highly important to make sure that, when an F CODE is to be assigned to a mailbox, it does
not duplicate one already assigned to a bulletin board.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Documents can be received in a mailbox only when their F CODE passwords match.
F CODE Password Reception Procedure:
Set Remote Input Check to ON when an account registers with the system.
See Registering Account (Account Input). p.8-38, 9-12

Chapter 6

F CODE Password Reception

6-34

Various Ways of Using Your Facsimile

Chapter 6

5. Using F CODE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-1

Chapter 7

Chapter 7

Setting the Utility Mode

Setting the Utility Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-2

1. Using the Utility Mode


Programming and Setting Screens
This chapter explains the major setting and programming screens that are available by using the Utility
key.

Users Choice

Meter Count

The machine has been set so that the most


frequently used settings are automatically selected
in the initial mode.
Making the Users Choice Settings p.8-2

Shows the total number of prints made since the


installation of the machine.
Using Meter Count p.7-16

4016P124CA
4016P135CA

Copy Job Recall

Allows the various settings and programming for


using fax-related functions.
Settings for FAX Input p.8-8

Chapter 7

Setting the Utility Mode

FAX Input

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

You can store ten frequently used job settings in


memory to call up later for quick job setup.
Recalling a Job from Memory p.7-15

4016P133CA
4016P333CB

7-3
1. Using the Utility Mode

User Management

Report

Allows for making the basic user settings for daily


operation of the machine.
Settings in User Management p.7-17

Allows you to print reports and lists.


Settings for Report p.7-21

4016P334CA
4017P131EA

Admin. Management

Setting the Utility Mode

Allows the administrator of the machine to make


settings for operating and maintaining the
machine.
Settings in Admin. Management p.9-2

Chapter 7

4016P143CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-4
1. Using the Utility Mode

List of Programming/Setting Items


Input

Users Choice

Abbr. #
One-Touch
Index
FAX Program
FAX Input
Relay Group
Self-Abbr. #
Bultn.
Account Input

Meter Count

Copy Job Recall

Copy Job Program Recall (1-10)

Setting the Utility Mode

Utility

Confirmation Beep
Alarm Volume
Line Monitor Volume
Panel Cleaning

User Management

Dehumidify
Toner Replenisher

Chapter 7

Data Send

Admin. Management

p.7-6

TX Act. Report
RX Act. Report
Report 1
Bulletin Board List
Account List
Report
One-Touch List
Abbr. # List
Report 2
FAX Program List
Relay Group List

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-5
1. Using the Utility Mode

1/6

Memory Recall
Mixed Original Detection
Date/Time Set
Language Sslected
Original

Copy Default

Auto Paper/Auto Size


2/6

Drawer Priority
Special Paper
Multiple-in-1 and Booklet Copy Zoom
Auto Panel Reset
Energy Save Mode

3/6

Plug-in Counter, ID key Reset


Sleep Mode Setting
LCD Back-light Off
4in1 Copy Order
Density Priority

4/6

Default Copy Output Levels


Printing Density
Output Priority
Intelligent Sorting
Output Tray

5/6

6/6
Density (ADF only)

Account Name
Account 1

Access Code

Account 2

Account TSI

F CODE

F CODE Password

No.

F CODE

Remote Input Check


Priority Screen
Priority Screen
Func.

Priority FAX Screen


Received Document
Priority Quality

TX 1

Priority Contrast
Com. Mode
TX

TX 2

TSI
TX Marker
TX Report

Output
Report Screen

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 7

Scanner Dry
Priority Screen

Setting the Utility Mode

"Small" Originals

7-6
1. Using the Utility Mode

Administrator Set

Max. Copy Sets


Disable Sleep Mode

100 Accounts 1
100 Accounts 2
Copy Track Mode
1000 Accounts
OFF
Copy Track

No.
Total Count
Size Count
Copy Track Data
Copy Limit
Access Code
All Counter Reset

Input Accounts

Setting the Utility Mode

Initial Settings

Admin. Management

FAX Recept Settings

Priority Quality
TX Set 1

Priority Contrast
Com. Mode
TX

FAX Trans. Settings

TSI
TX Set 2
Password TX
TX Marker

Chapter 7

Relay-station Print
TX Set 3
Line Selection

No. of Print
Account Meter

Pages of TX Doc.
All Clear

TX Report
Report Screen
Report Settings
Activity Report
Memory Clear Report

Account Count Report


Report Printing

Account List
Setting List

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-7
1. Using the Utility Mode

Account Name
Account 1

Access Code

Account 2

Account TSI

F CODE

F CODE Password

No.

F CODE

Remote Input Check


Priority Screen
Priority Screen
Priority FAX Screen

Func.
Received Document
Priority Quality
TX 1

Priority Contrast
Com. Mode
TX

TX 2

TSI
TX Marker
TX Report

Output

Report Screen
Max. Print Page

TSI
Self-ID
Self-telephone # 1
Self-telephone # 2
Line Type (1)
Line Type (2)
Line
PSTN/Ext Line Switch 1
PSTN/Ext Line Switch 2
Default Device Priority
Func.

Received Document

Manage

Incomplete TX Hold

Priority FAX Screen

Chapter 7

Com. Password

Reception Mode
RX 1
No. of RX Call Rings

RX 2

Second Dial

Password Reception
RX 3
RX Time Stamp
Long Document
LongDoc

Reduction
Cut Off Length
If no paper matching up to TX Doc. size?

Paper 1

Print Paper Select


Unselectable Cassette
2in1 Receive

Paper 2
Rotation Print

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Setting the Utility Mode

ID

G3

7-8

2. Required Initial Programming Items and Confirmation of Initial Settings


To take full advantage of this machine, it is recommended that the current time-of-day, one-touch dialing
numbers, and other settings explained in the following be programmed in advance.
Various settings, including those for printing styles of reports, have been factory-set: They can be
changed according to your own needs. Check these settings before starting operations.

Required Initial Programming Items


The following items must be programmed before use.
Date/Time Set p.8-2
Self-Telephone Number (of your ordinary subscriber telephone lines) p.9-18
To make effective use of the machine, it is recommended that the following items be programmed:
Self-ID (your name and fax number) p.9-18
Abbreviated Dialing p.8-10
One-Touch Dialing p.8-16
Index p.8-22
Facsimile Program p.8-23

Checking the Initial Settings

Chapter 7

Setting the Utility Mode

Report printing and function settings have been made at the factory. Check these factory settings and
make necessary changes according to your own operating needs.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-9

Chapter 7

Setting the Utility Mode

2. Required Initial Programming Items and Confirmation of Initial Settings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-10

3. Entering Characters
This section explains how to enter characters when storing your TSI, the name of a destination in a preset
key, and other data.

Alphanumeric Screen
Area to Display Characters

Character Selection Area

4016P335CA

Use the character keys to select the desired characters. Select from among those displayed.
Touch [Symbol] to enter symbols.
Touch [Caps] to enter capital letters. Capital letters are entered when [Caps] is highlighted.
Touch [Space] to enter a space.
Use the 10-Key Pad on the control panel to enter numerals.
Touch [] or [] to move the cursor.
To delete a character, align the cursor with the character to be deleted and touch [Del.].
To clear all characters entered, press the Clear key on the control panel.

Chapter 7

Setting the Utility Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-11
3. Entering Characters

Entering Letters

Entering Symbols

Touch [Symbol].

4016P335CA

Touch the corresponding symbol key to be


entered.

4016P336CA

Touch [Enter] or [Next].

Useful Tips
To enter letters, touch [Alpha].
Touch [Space] to enter a space between
symbols.
To delete a symbol, align the cursor with the
symbol to be deleted and touch [Del.].
Touch [] or [] to move the cursor.
To clear all characters entered, press the Clear
key on the control panel.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter] or [Next].

Setting the Utility Mode

Useful Tips
To enter small letters, touch [Caps] to deselect
it and then enter the characters.
To enter symbols, touch [Symbol] to display the
symbol key.
Touch [Space] to enter a space between
characters.
To delete a character, align the cursor with the
character to be deleted and touch [Del.].
Touch [] or [] to move the cursor.
To clear all characters entered, press the Clear
key on the control panel.

4016P340CA

Chapter 7

Touch characters to be entered in succession.

7-12

4. Job Memory Input and Job Recall


Job Memory Input
You can store ten frequently used job settings in memory to call up later for quick job setup.

Storing a Job

1
2

Set up the job you want to store in memory.

Select any one of the 10 job number keys


from [1] to [10] marked with
.

Press the Mode Check key.

1166O242EA

Touch [Job Mem Input].

4016P113CA

NOTE
A job number key not marked with
indicates
that a job has already been stored under that
number. If you store a new job in that number
key, the old job will be erased.

6
4016P111CA

To check for the details of the job stored,


touch [Check] and then touch the job number
key.

Touch [Input].

Chapter 7

Setting the Utility Mode

4016P114CA

4016P112CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

NOTE
Job Memory Input is disabled in the Interrupt
mode.

7-13
4. Job Memory Input and Job Recall

The job settings appear on the Touch Panel.

4016P115CA

Useful Tip
To turn over the screen page, touch [Next] or
[Backup].

After you have checked the settings, touch


[Enter].

Touch [Exit].

Setting the Utility Mode

Chapter 7

4016P116CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-14
4. Job Memory Input and Job Recall

Deleting a Job Program

Press the Mode Check key.

Touch the job number key from which you


want to delete a job program.

1166O242EA

Touch [Job Mem Input].


4016P118CA

Useful Tip
When
appears in that key, it indicates that
the job program has been deleted.

Setting the Utility Mode

Touch [Exit].

4016P111CA

Touch [Delete].

Chapter 7

4016P119CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4016P117CA

7-15
4. Job Memory Input and Job Recall

Recalling a Job from Memory

Press the Utility key.

Check the settings made and then touch


[Enter]. The machine is now set up for these
settings and the Basic screen reappears.

1166O243EA

Touch [Copy Job Recall].

4016P122CA

Touch the job number key in which the


desired job has been stored.

4012P121CA

Useful Tip
Only the number keys of stored jobs will be
displayed on the screen.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Setting the Utility Mode

Chapter 7

4016P120CA

Useful Tips
To turn over the screen page, touch [Next] or
[Backup].
If the job recalled is not what you want, touch
[Cancel]. Then the Copy Job Recall screen will
reappear.

7-16

5. Meter Count
Using Meter Count
Meter Counter allows you to check the total number of prints made since the installation of the machine.
It gives the count for each of the following five totals.

Total Counter

2-Sided Size

Shows the total number of prints made since the


installation of the machine.

Shows the number of 2-sided prints made on paper


of a preset size. (The same size as set for Size
Counter.)

Size Counter
Shows the number of prints made on paper of a
preset size. (The size will be set by your Technical
Representative.)

Account Total
Shows the total number of prints made by the
active accounts.

2-Sided Total
Shows the number of 2-sided prints made.

Press the Utility key.

Check the screen that appears.

1166O243EA

Touch [Meter Count].


4016P124CA

Chapter 7

Setting the Utility Mode

4016P123CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-17

6. Settings in User Management


Setting the Confirmation Beep and Alarm Volume
Confirmation Beep

Line Monitor Volume

The volume of the confirmation beep that can be


heard when a control panel key is pressed may be
adjusted in the range between 0 (zero) and 5
(high).
The initial setting is 3.

The volume of the line monitor that can be heard


from the monitor speaker during facsimile
transmission may be adjusted in the range between
0 (zero) and 5 (large).
The initial setting is 3.

Alarm Volume
The volume of the alarm beep that sounds when,
for example, a paper misfeed occurs, may be
adjusted in the range between 0 (zero) and 5
(high).
The initial setting is 3.

Press the Utility key.

Select the desired function.


For example, touch [Confirmation Beep].

Setting the Utility Mode

1166O243EA

Touch [User Management].

Touch [] or [] to adjust the volume to the


desired level and then touch [Enter].

4016P125CA

4016P127CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 7

4017P126EA

7-18
6. Settings in User Management

Using the Dehumidify Function


During times of high humidity or when there are sudden rapid changes in humidity (especially when you
are using a heater in winter), condensation*1can form on the surface of the PC Drum*2and Scanner,
resulting in blotchy copies. In such instances, use Dehumidify to dry the surface of the PC Drum and
Scanner.
*1

*2

Condensation: A phenomenon in which small drops of water form on cold surfaces, such as the
surface of the PC Drum.
PC Drum:
Functions in the copier like film in a camera.

Useful Tips
Ask your Tech. Rep. for further details about whether or not to use this function.
A print cycle can be initiated even while the machine is in the Dehumidify cycle. (At this time
Dehumidify will be stopped.)

Press the Utility key.

Touch [Dehumidify].

Touch [User Management].

Chapter 7

Setting the Utility Mode

1166O243EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4017P128EA

4016P125CA

7-19
6. Settings in User Management

Using the Toner Replenisher Function


The machine tends to exhaust the supply of toner rapidly when printing a number of pages using an
original with dark solid areas such as a photo. As a result, the image density of the printed page will
become lighter. In such cases, you can use Toner Replenisher to regain the normal image density quickly.
NOTES
Do not turn OFF the Power Switch or open the Right Door or Toner Bottle Cover while the machine is
replenishing toner.
Toner will not be replenished if the image density is sufficiently high.
The toner replenishing sequence ends automatically.

Press the Utility key.

1166O243EA

Touch [User Management].


Setting the Utility Mode

Chapter 7

4016P125CA

Touch [Toner Replenisher].

4017P129EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-20
6. Settings in User Management

Panel Cleaning

Data Send

To clean the surface of the Touch Panel, use this


function. p.11-10

For more details, consult your Technical


Representative.

Chapter 7

Setting the Utility Mode

4012P130CB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7-21

7. Settings for Report


Printing Reports and Lists
Report 2

TX Act. Report

One-Touch List

The TX Act. Report can be printed to check the


document number, transmission start time,
destination, mode, number of pages transmitted,
result, and other data.
The factory setting for this report is to
automatically print one after each 50
transmissions. p.9-32

The destinations programmed in one-touch keys


can be printed on a list in order of key number for
confirmation.

The destinations programmed as abbreviated


dialing can be printed on a list in order of key
number for confirmation.

The RX Act. Report can be printed to check the


document number, reception start time, duration,
destination, mode, number of pages printed, result,
and other data.
The factory setting for this report is to
automatically print one after each 50
transmissions. p.9-32

Details of communications settings (facsimile


programs) programmed as one-touch programs
can be printed as a report.

Bulletin Board List

Details of groups programmed for Relay


Broadcast Transmission can be printed as a report.

A list of documents posted on the bulletin board


can be printed as a report.

Account List
When the Copy Track function has been set, a list
of account information including the settings for
communication data can be printed for check.
Each account can print his/her own list only. The
administrator, on the other hand, can print lists of
all accounts registered with the system. p.9-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fax Program List

Relay Group List

Setting the Utility Mode

RX Act. Report

Abbr. # List

Chapter 7

Report 1

7-22
7. Settings for Report

Press the Utility key.

Select the function to be printed.

1166O243EA

NOTE
To print an Account List, first select the specific
account before pressing the Utility key.
4016P344CA

Useful Tip
To print a Fax Program List under [Report 2],
touch [FAX Program List] and then select the
program to be printed.

Touch [Report].

Touch [Enter].

4016P342CA

Touch [Report 1] or [Report 2].

Chapter 7

Setting the Utility Mode

NOTE
When [FAX Program List] has been selected,
press the Start key.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4016P343CA

8-1

Chapter 8

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

Users Choice and FAX Input

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-2

1. Making the Users Choice Settings


The machine has been set so that the most frequently used settings are automatically selected in the initial
mode. Users Choice allows you to select the default settings according to your own needs. By setting the
defaults that are most frequently used, time required to make extra settings will be eliminated when the
machine is turned ON or Auto Panel Reset is activated.

Users Choice Functions


A list of Users Choice functions is given in six
pages of menu, from [1/6] to [6/6]. To show the
listing of each page, touch the desired page
number key at the top of the Touch Panel.

4016P135CA

Chapter 8

p.8-3

4/6

p.8-4

Memory Recall

4in1 Copy Order

Mixed Original Detection

Density Priority

Date/Time Set

Default Copy Output Levels

Language Selected

Printing Density

2/6

p.8-3

Original

Copy Default

Users Choice and FAX Input

1/6

Output Priority
5/6

p.8-5

Auto Paper/Auto Size

Intelligent Sorting

Drawer Priority

Output Tray

Special Paper

Small Originals

Multiple-in-1 and Booklet Copy


Zoom

Scanner Dry
6/6

3/6

p.8-4

Auto Panel Reset


Energy Save Mode
Plug-In Counter, ID Key Reset
Sleep Mode Setting
LCD Back-light Off

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

p.8-6

Priority Screen
Density (ADF only)

8-3
1. Making the Users Choice Settings

1/6

2/6

Original

<Di251f/Di351f only>
Select whether to enable (ON) the function that
allows you to use the same image data of the copy
cycle that has just been completed, or not (OFF).
The initial setting is OFF.

Specify the original copy type automatically


selected when power is turned ON, or panel reset.
The initial setting is 1-Sided 1-Sided.

Mixed Original Detection

Specify the default mode selected automatically


when power is turned ON, or panel reset, either
Auto Paper, Auto Size, or Manual.
The initial setting is Auto Paper.

Auto Paper/Auto Size

Drawer Priority
Specify the default paper source that is
automatically selected.
The initial setting is 1 (1st Drawer).

Select whether to default to Mixed Original


Detection (ON) or not (OFF).
The initial setting is OFF.
* If the following combination is set in Users
Choice, the Mixed Orig. Detection will be
automatically canceled and the copies will be
made in 1-Sided 2-Sided copy mode.
Original Copy Default
: 1-Sided 2-Sided
Mixed Orig. Detection: ON

Copy Default

Memory Recall

Set the date and current time-of-day.


It is also possible to set Time Zone and Daylight
Svgs. Time.
Time Zone can range between -12:00 and +12:00,
variable in 30-min. increments.
The initial setting is -05:00.
For Daylight Svgs. Time, select whether to
automatically set the daylight saving time or not.
The initial setting is Auto.
* For Time Zone, set the difference from the
standard time that is attached on the header of email for e-mail transmission and reception. To
use the e-mail function, Network Application
kit-2 is required.

Designate a drawer for special paper.


The initial setting is Normal for all drawers.
* For special paper setting, see Special Paper
Setting.p.3-6

Multiple-in-1 and Booklet Copy Zoom


Select whether to enable (ON) or disable
(OFF) recalling a default zoom ratio for 4in1,
2in1, Booklet Creation, and 2in1 Separation.
4in1
: 0.500 (Di251f/Di351f only)
2in1
: 0.647
Booklet
: 0.647 (Di251f/Di351f only)
2in1 Separation : 1.545
The initial setting is ON.

Users Choice and FAX Input

Date/Time Set

Special Paper

Select the language of the Touch Panel messages.


The initial setting is English.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 8

Language Selected

8-4
1. Making the Users Choice Settings

3/6

Auto Panel Reset

4in1 Copy Order

Select the time for the auto panel reset function to


be activated from among 30 seconds, 1 min,
2 min, 3 min, or 5 min, or not activated at all
(No Reset).
The initial setting is 1 min.

<Di251f/Di351f only>
Select the default copying order in the 4-in-1 mode
from these two:

Energy Save Mode


Set the time for the machine to enter the Energy
Save mode, from 1 min to 240 min (in 1 min
increments).
The initial setting is 15 min.

Plug-In Counter, ID Key Reset


Select whether to reset the panel (ON) or not
(OFF) when the Plug-In Counter is pulled out of
the machine.
The initial setting is ON.

Sleep Mode Setting


Select the time for the Sleep function to be
activated, from 15 min to 240 min in 1 min
increments.
The initial setting is 30 min for Di200f and 60
min for Di251f/Di351f.
* A setting is also possible to disable Sleep.
p.9-5

LCD Back-light Off


Set the time for the machine to enter the LCD
Back-light Off, from 1 min to 240 min (in 1 min
increments).
The initial setting is 1min.

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

4/6

1 2

1 3

3 4

2 4
1 2

The initial setting is

3 4

Density Priority
Select the default density setting selected
automatically in the initial mode. Select either
Auto or Manual for the exposure mode and
Text, Photo, or Text/Photo for the image
quality setting.
The initial settings are Auto for the exposure
mode and Text for the image quality setting.
* Auto cannot be combined with Photo.

Default Copy Output Levels


<Auto>
Select the default exposure level in the Auto
Exposure mode, either Lighter, Normal, or
Darker.
The initial setting is Normal.
<Manual>
Set the default exposure level in the Manual
Exposure mode.
The initial setting is 5.
* With EXP5 at the central level, the exposure
level will become lower (Lighter) as the number
becomes smaller, and higher (Darker) as the
number becomes greater.

4003P167CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-5
1. Making the Users Choice Settings

4/6

5/6

Printing Density

Intelligent Sorting

Select the print exposure level from among -2, 1, 0, 1, or 2.


The initial setting is 0.

Select whether to turn ON or OFF the


function that automatically switches between Sort
and Non-Sort, selecting Non-Sort if only a single
original is loaded and Sort if two or more originals
are loaded in the document feeder.
The initial setting is ON.

Output Priority
Select the default combination of the finishing
type when the machine is equipped with a Finisher
or Mailbin Finisher from among the following:
Non-Sort, Sort, Group,
Hole Punch (Only when Finisher FN-504 is
mounted.)
2-Hole Punch (Only when Finisher FN-109 is
mounted.)
3-Hole Punch (Only when Finisher FN-109 is
mounted.)
Corner Staple
2-Point Staple
(Only when Finisher FN-109 is mounted.)
The initial setting is Non-Sort.

Output Tray
Select either 1(st bin), 2(nd bin), or 3(rd
bin) for output when the machine is equipped
with a Job Tray, Finisher, or Mailbin Finisher.
The initial setting is
When a Job Tray is mounted
PC prints: 1
Copies: 2
When a Finisher is mounted
PC prints: 2 (Elevator Tray)
When a Mailbin Finisher is mounted
PC prints: 2 (Elevator Tray)
* The 3(rd bin) option becomes available only
when an Option Tray is mounted.

Scanner Dry
Set the time for automatically dehumidifying the
Scanner. Any value up to 24 hours may be set in 1
min. increments.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 8

Select whether to enable (ON) a copy cycle or


not (OFF) when it is initiated by pressing the
Start key with no originals placed on the Original
Glass or with an original smaller than the
detectable size placed on the glass in the Auto
Paper mode.
If this function is turned ON, the copy cycle will
run using the paper loaded in the default paper
source. If turned OFF, a warning message
appears to instruct the user to select the paper.
The initial setting is ON.

Users Choice and FAX Input

Small Originals

8-6
1. Making the Users Choice Settings

6/6

Priority Screen
Select the priority application set when Auto Panel
Reset is activated from Copier, FAX, or
Auto.
The default setting is Copier.

Density (ADF only)


Adjust the copy image density level when the
machine is equipped with an Automatic Document
Feeder.

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

: Mode 2
: Mode 1
Select the density level according to the original,
either Mode 1 or Mode 2.
The initial setting is Mode 1.
Mode 1:Used for the standard original, such as a
word-processor made document.
Mode 2:Effective in reproducing a pale original,
such as a faint pencil-written document.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-7
1. Making the Users Choice Settings

Making the Users Choice Settings

Press the Utility key.

Touch the key of the desired page of the


menu, from 1/6 to 6/6.
For example, to change Output Priority from
Non-Sort to Sort, touch [4/6].

1166O243EA

Touch [Input].

4016P139CA

Touch the key of the desired Users Choice


function.
For example, touch [Output Priority].

4016P137CA

Touch [Users Choice].

4016P140CA

Touch [Sort].

Chapter 8

4016P138CB

Users Choice and FAX Input

4017P141EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter].
*Repeat steps 3 to 6 to make new settings for
other Users Choice functions.

Touch [Exit].

8-8

2. Settings for FAX Input


Various settings for fax communications can be made.
They include those for making transmission of documents easy and accurate. It is also possible to make
settings for relay transmission.

FAX Input Items


Abbr. #

Relay Group

If a destination number has been previously


programmed for abbreviated dialing, you can
easily and accurately set that destination without
having to enter the fax number from the 10-Key
Pad.

Programming the receiving station (final


destination) as a relay group is convenient when
this machine is used as a relay station.

One-Touch

When this machine acts as an originating station to


perform relay transmissions, the relay station sets
an abbreviated dialing number to send a relay
status report back to you.

Bultn.

Index

Settings are made required for setting up a bulletin


board.

If one-touch keys are classified, such as by


branches, suppliers, and the like, using the index
keys, it is much easier to find the target one-touch
key.

Account Input

FAX Program
If you program, in advance, the various functions
that can be used for facsimile transmission
together with the information on a specific
destination in a key, you have only to touch that
key to start transmission without having to set
communications functions each time.
This is useful when documents are routinely sent
to the same destination every day.

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

If a destination number has been previously


programmed for one-touch dialing, you can easily
and accurately set that destination without having
to enter the fax number from the 10-Key Pad.

Self-Abbr. #

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The information on the settings made by the


administrator as he/she registers an account with
the system and the initial status of this machine
can be altered for each account.

8-9
2. Settings for FAX Input

Selecting FAX Input

Press the Utility key.

1166O243EA

Touch [Input].

4016P137CA

Touch [FAX Input].

4016P347CB

A screen appears showing the various


functions available from FAX Input.

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

4016P333CB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-10
2. Settings for FAX Input

Setting Abbreviated Dialing Numbers


If a destination number has been previously programmed for abbreviated dialing, you can easily and
accurately set that destination without having to enter the fax number from the 10-Key Pad.
A maximum of 500 different destinations can be programmed including one-touch dialing numbers.
A list of destinations programmed for abbreviated dialing can be printed. Printing Reports and Lists
p.7-21

Programming a Number for Abbreviated Dialing

For how to show the [Abbr. #] key, see


Selecting FAX Input. p.8-9

Touch [Abbr. #].

Enter the name of the destination and touch


[Next].
Entering Characters p.7-10

4016P350CB

4016P348CB

Users Choice and FAX Input

Select the abbreviated number, in which to


program the destination.

Useful Tip
Up to 12 characters may be entered.

Check the 3-digit abbreviated number and


touch [Next].

Chapter 8

4016P349CA

Useful Tips
Touch the corresponding tab from [#000] to
[#400] and use [] or [] to select an empty
number key.
You can also touch the [Abbr. #] key on the
bottom of the screen and enter the desired
abbreviated number from the 10-Key Pad to
select it. An abbreviated number can range
between 000 and 499.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4016P351CA

8-11
2. Settings for FAX Input

Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the fax number


of the destination.

Select the communication mode and touch


[Enter].

4017P352EA

Useful Tips
If a wrong numeral has been entered, use []
or [], to move the cursor to that numeral and
enter the correct one. Or press the Clear key to
start the procedure over to enter the correct
number. Touching [Delete] will erase the
character on the cursor.
Pressing the Pause key will insert a pause of
about 3 seconds.
When [Tone] is touched even if a pulse dialing
line is used, tone dialing line signals can be
sent.
Up to 64 digits can be entered for the fax
number.

4016P354CA

Useful Tip
G3-1, 2 : Select when transmitting documents
to G3 fax machines over ordinary
subscriber telephone lines.
* This setting can be made only when the
optional G3 MULTIPORT SERIES 2 is
mounted.

Touch [Speed].

Touch [Com. Mode].

4017P355EA

10

Set the communication speed using [] or


[] and then touch [Enter].

Chapter 8

4017P353EA

4016P356CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Users Choice and FAX Input

8-12
2. Settings for FAX Input

11

To transmit the document to an overseas


destination, touch [Overseas].

14

Enter the F CODE from the 10-Key Pad and


touch [Enter].

4017P360EA

12

To program an F CODE, touch [F CODE].

4016P363CA

Useful Tip
Up to 20 digits can be programmed for an F
CODE.

15
16
17

Touch [Enter].
Touch [Next].
Check the details of the settings made.

Users Choice and FAX Input

4017P361EA

13

Select the desired F CODE key to be set.


Using F CODE p.6-30

4017P367EA

Chapter 8

4016P362CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful Tips
Select [Dest.], [Mode], [F CODE], or [OneTouch] and touch the corresponding function
key. This allows you to change the setting made.
p.8-13
Touch [Cancel] to restore the settings to the
original state (before any setting was made).

18

Touch [Enter].

8-13
2. Settings for FAX Input

Modifying or Deleting Abbreviated


Number

Touch [Abbr. #].

Select the item to be modified or deleted and


change the setting. Touching [Del.] will
delete the settings made for the abbreviated
number selected.

4016P369CB

4016P348CB

Select the abbreviated number to be modified


or deleted.

Useful Tips
When [Del.] is touched, you will be prompted to
answer [Yes] or [No]. If you are sure to delete
the settings, touch [Yes].
Select [Dest.], [Mode], [F CODE], or [OneTouch] and touch the corresponding function
key. This allows you to change the setting made.

4016P368CA

Useful Tips
Touch the corresponding tab from [#000] to
[#400] and use [] and [] to select the
abbreviated number key to be modified or
deleted.
You can also touch the [Abbr. #] key on the
bottom of the screen and enter the desired
abbreviated number from the 10-Key Pad to
select it. An abbreviated number can range
between 000 and 499.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter].
Users Choice and FAX Input

For how to show the [Abbr. #] key, see


Selecting FAX Input. p.8-9

Chapter 8

8-14
2. Settings for FAX Input

Programming the Setting Details in


One-Touch Key

For how to show the [Abbr. #] key, see


Selecting FAX Input. p.8-9

Touch [Abbr. #].

Select [One-Touch] and then touch [Register


to One-Touch].

4016P370CA

4016P348CB

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

Select the abbreviated number to be


programmed in a one-touch key.

Touch the appropriate one-touch key, to


program the abbreviated number settings
made.

4016P371CB
4016P368CA

Useful Tips
Touch the corresponding tab from [#000] to
[#400] and use [] and [] to select the
abbreviated number key to be programmed.
You can also touch the [Abbr. #] key on the
bottom of the screen and enter the desired
abbreviated number from the 10-Key Pad to
select it. An abbreviated number can range
between 000 and 499.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful Tip
Touch the appropriate index tab, [], [], or
[Index List] to quickly access an unused onetouch key.

Touch [Enter].

8-15

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

2. Settings for FAX Input

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-16
2. Settings for FAX Input

Setting One-Touch Dialing Numbers


If a destination number has been previously programmed for one-touch dialing, you can easily and
accurately set that destination without having to enter the fax number from the 10-Key Pad.
A total of up to 300 destinations can be programmed for one-touch dialing.
A list of destinations programmed for one-touch dialing can be printed. Printing Reports and Lists
p.7-21
It will be easier to retrieve a destination if an index to classify them is made as they are programmed.
Programming an Index for One-Touch Keys p.8-22

Programming a Number for OneTouch Dialing

For how to show the [One-Touch] key, see


Selecting FAX Input. p.8-9

Touch [One-Touch].

Enter the name of the destination and touch


[Next].
Entering Characters p.7-10

4016P350CB

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

4016P373CB

Select the appropriate one-touch key, to


program the destination.

Useful Tip
Up to 12 characters may be entered.

Enter the 3-digit abbreviated number and


touch [Next].

4016P372CA

Useful Tip
Touch the appropriate index tab, [], [], or
[Index List] to select an unused one-touch key.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4016P374CA

8-17
2. Settings for FAX Input

Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the fax number


of the destination.

Select the communication mode and touch


[Enter].

4016P354CA

4017P375EA

Useful Tips
If a wrong numeral has been entered, use []
or [] to move the cursor to that numeral and
enter the correct one. Or, press the Clear key to
start the procedure over to enter the correct
number. Touching [Delete] will erase the
character on the cursor.
Pressing the Pause key will insert a pause of
about 3 seconds.
When [Tone] is touched even if a pulse dialing
line is used, tone dialing line signals can be
sent.
Up to 64 digits can be entered for the fax
number.

Useful Tip
G3-1, 2 : Select when transmitting documents
to G3 fax machines over ordinary
subscriber telephone lines.
* This setting can be made only when the
optional G3 MULTIPORT SERIES 2 is
mounted.

Touch [Speed].

Touch [Com. Mode].

4017P377EA

Set the communication speed using [] or


[] and then touch [Enter].

Chapter 8

10

4017P376EA

4016P356CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Users Choice and FAX Input

8-18
2. Settings for FAX Input

11

To transmit the document to an overseas


destination, touch [Overseas].

12

To program an F CODE, touch [F CODE].

14

Enter the F CODE from the 10-Key Pad and


touch [Enter].

4016P363CA

4017P379EA

Useful Tip
Up to 20 digits can be programmed for an F
CODE.

15
16
17

Touch [Enter].
Touch [Next].
Check the details of the settings made.

4017P380EA

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

13

Select the desired F CODE key to be set.


Using F CODE p.6-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4017P383EA

4016P362CA

Useful Tips
Select [Dest.], [Mode], [F CODE], or [OneTouch] and touch the corresponding function
key. This allows you to change the setting made.
p.8-19
Touch [Cancel] to restore the settings to the
original state (before any setting was made).

18

Touch [Enter].

8-19
2. Settings for FAX Input

Modifying or Deleting One-Touch


Dialing Number
For how to show the [One-Touch] key, see
Selecting FAX Input. p.8-9

Touch [One-Touch].

Select the item to be modified or deleted and


change the setting. Touching [Del.] will
delete the settings made for the abbreviated
number selected.

4016P385CA

4016P373CB

Select the one-touch dialing key to be


modified or deleted.

Useful Tips
When [Del.] is touched, you will be prompted to
answer [Yes] or [No]. If you are sure to delete
the settings, touch [Yes].
Select [Dest.], [Mode], [F CODE], or [OneTouch] and touch the corresponding function
key. This allows you to change the setting made.

5
4016P384CA

Chapter 8

Useful Tip
Touch the appropriate index tab, [], [], or
[Index List] to select the one-touch key to be
modified or deleted.

Touch [Enter].
Users Choice and FAX Input

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-20
2. Settings for FAX Input

Moving the Display Position for OneTouch Keys

For how to show the [One-Touch] key, see


Selecting FAX Input. p.8-9

Touch [One-Touch].

Touch [One-Touch] and then [One-Touch


Layout].

4016P386CA

4016P373CB

Touch the one-touch key in the desired


position.

Select the one-touch key to be moved.

4016P387CA
4016P384CA

Useful Tip
Touch the appropriate index tab, [], [], or
[Index List] to select the one-touch key to be
moved.

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter].

8-21

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

2. Settings for FAX Input

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-22
2. Settings for FAX Input

Setting Indexes
If one-touch keys are classified, such as by branches, suppliers, and the like, it is much easier to find the
target one-touch key by using the index keys.
There are 20 index keys available, each containing up to 15 one-touch keys, so a total of up to 300
destinations can be programmed.

Programming an Index for OneTouch Keys

For how to show the [Index] key, see


Selecting FAX Input. p.8-9

Touch [Index].

Enter the index name. Entering Characters


p.7-10

4016P390CA

4016P388CB

Users Choice and FAX Input

Select the index key into which one-touch


keys are to be classified.

4016P389CA

Chapter 8

Useful Tips
Up to eight characters can be entered.
To change an index name, press the Clear key
and re-enter the name. Or, use [] or [] to
move the cursor to a specific character, touch
[Del.], and enter the new one.
To delete an index name, press the Clear key.

Useful Tip
If you want to change the title of an index, touch
to select the corresponding index key.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter].

8-23
2. Settings for FAX Input

Settings for Facsimile Programs


If you program in advance the various functions that can be used for facsimile transmission together with
the information on a specific destination in one key, you have only to touch that key to start transmission
without having to set communications functions each time.
This is useful when documents are routinely sent to the same destination every day.
Up to 30 facsimile program keys can be used. The total of facsimile program keys and one-touch keys
cannot, however, exceed 300. A facsimile program key name can consist of up to 12 characters.
* The destinations for facsimile programs must be preprogrammed in one-touch dialing or as abbreviated
dialing before attempting to set up programs for them. p.8-10, 8-16

Index Key
Facsimile programs share
these keys with one-touch
dialing keys.

4016P251CA

Polling RX

Relay TX
A program can be set up in which a document is
temporarily transmitted to another fax machine,
which in turn transmits the document to multiple
fax machines.

Chapter 8

The time for polling reception can be


programmed.

Batch
Transmission of multiple documents at a
predetermined time can be programmed.
Users Choice and FAX Input

TX
The functions to be programmed include Image
Quality, Contrast, Reduction, Serial Broadcast
Transmission, Real Time Transmission, Priority
Transmission, Timer Transmission, TSI,
Destination Insertion, Transmission Report,
Remote Copy, Password Transmission, 2in1
Transmission, 2-Sided Transmission, and TX
Marker.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-24
2. Settings for FAX Input

FAX Program Procedures


TX

For how to show the [FAX Program] key, see


Selecting FAX Input. p.8-9

Touch [FAX Program].

Enter the name of the program and touch


[Next].
Entering Characters p.7-10

4016P393CA
4016P391CB

Select the one-touch key (or facsimile


program key) in which the facsimile program
is to be stored.

4016P392CA

Useful Tip
Touch the appropriate index tab, [], [], or
[Index List] to select an unused one-touch key.

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful Tip
Up to 12 characters may be entered.

Select [TX] and touch [Next].

4016P394CA

8-25
2. Settings for FAX Input

10

Touch [One-Touch] or [Abbr. #].

Touch [Quality/Reduction] and/or [Menu],


and select the functions to be programmed.

4016P395CA

Select the destination and touch [Enter].


Using One-Touch Dialing for
Transmission p.5-6
Using Abbreviated Dialing for
Transmission p.5-7

8
9

Touch [Next].

4016P397CA

NOTES
Timer Transmission and Real Time
Transmission cannot be selected
simultaneously.
It two or more destinations are selected for
Real Time Transmission, the Real Time
Transmission setting will be reset.
It two or more destinations are selected for
Priority Transmission, the Priority
Transmission setting will be reset.
When 2in1 Transmission is selected, Auto Size
is selected as the zoom ratio.
Useful Tip
When [Quality/Reduction] is selected, you can
then set [Quality], [Reduction], [Contrast], and
[Scan Area].

Touch [Transmission Setting].

11
12

Touch [Enter].

13

Touch [Enter].

Check the details of the settings made and


make sure that you have made the correct
settings.

Users Choice and FAX Input

Useful Tips
If Serial Broadcast Transmission is to be
programmed, select all destinations to be
transmitted.
If the destination is not to be programmed,
touch [No Dest.].

Chapter 8

4016P396CA

4016P398CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-26
2. Settings for FAX Input

Batch

For how to show the [FAX Program] key, see


Selecting FAX Input. p.8-9

Touch [FAX Program].

Enter the name of the program and touch


[Next].
Entering Characters p.7-10

4016P393CA
4016P391CB

Select the one-touch key (or facsimile


program key) in which the facsimile program
is to be stored.

Select [Batch] and touch [Next].

4016P399CA

4016P392CA

Useful Tip
Touch the appropriate index tab, [], [], or
[Index List] to select an unused one-touch key.

Touch [One-Touch] or [Abbr. #].

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

Useful Tip
Up to 12 characters may be entered.

4016P400CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-27
2. Settings for FAX Input

Select the destination and touch [Enter].


Using One-Touch Dialing for
Transmission p.5-6
Using Abbreviated Dialing for
Transmission p.5-7

8
9

Touch [Next].

12

Touch [Quality/Reduction] and/or [Menu],


and select the functions to be programmed.

Touch [Hour], [Minute], and [Interval] and


set the time and transmission interval.

4016P397CA

NOTE
When 2in1 Transmission is selected, Auto Size is
selected as the zoom ratio.

4016P401CA

Touch [Next].

13
14

Touch [Transmission Setting].

Touch [Enter].
Check the details of the settings made and
make sure that you have made the correct
settings.
Users Choice and FAX Input

10
11

Useful Tip
When [Quality/Reduction] is selected, you can
then set [Quality], [Reduction], [Contrast], and
[Scan Area].

4016P402CA

15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter].

Chapter 8

4016P403CA

8-28
2. Settings for FAX Input

Polling RX

For how to show the [FAX Program] key, see


Selecting FAX Input. p.8-9

Touch [FAX Program].

Enter the name of the program and touch


[Next].
Entering Characters p.7-10

4016P393CA
4016P391CB

Select the one-touch key (or facsimile


program key) in which the facsimile program
is to be stored.

Select [Polling RX] and touch [Next].

4016P404CA

4016P392CA

Useful Tip
Touch the appropriate index tab, [], [], or
[Index List] to select an unused one-touch key.

Touch [One-Touch] or [Abbr. #].

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

Useful Tip
Up to 12 characters may be entered.

4016P400CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-29
2. Settings for FAX Input

Select the destination and touch [Enter].


Using One-Touch Dialing for
Transmission p.5-6
Using Abbreviated Dialing for
Transmission p.5-7

8
9

Touch [Next].

12

Check the details of the settings made and


make sure that you have made the correct
settings.

Touch [Timer Set].

4016P407CA

13

Touch [Enter].

4016P405CA

Touch [Hour] and [Minute] to set the time.

4016P406CA

Useful Tip
Touch [Timer OFF] if time is not to be specified.
Touch [Enter].

Chapter 8

11

Users Choice and FAX Input

10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-30
2. Settings for FAX Input

Relay TX

For how to show the [FAX Program] key, see


Selecting FAX Input. p.8-9

Touch [FAX Program].

Select the one-touch key (or facsimile


program key) in which the facsimile program
is to be stored.

Useful Tip
Up to 12 characters may be entered.

Select [Relay TX] and touch [Next].

4016P408CA

Touch [One-Touch] or [Abbr. #].

4016P409CA
4016P392CA

Useful Tip
Touch the appropriate index tab, [], [], or
[Index List] to select an unused one-touch key.

Enter the name of the program and touch


[Next].
Entering Characters p.7-10

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

4016P391CB

4016P393CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful Tip
Up to five stations can be selected. Some fax
machine models cannot, however, be specified as
relay stations.

Select the relay station and touch [Enter].


Using One-Touch Dialing for
Transmission p.5-6
Using Abbreviated Dialing for
Transmission p.5-7

8-31
2. Settings for FAX Input

Select the receiving station (final destination)


and touch [Enter].

12

Touch [Quality/Reduction] and/or [Menu],


and select the functions to be programmed.

4016P410CA

Useful Tips
Select the number assigned to relay groups
programmed as the relay stations.
Up to five groups can be selected.

9
10
11

Touch [Enter].
Touch [Next].
Touch [Transmission Setting].

4016P397CA

NOTES
Timer Transmission and Real Time
Transmission cannot be selected
simultaneously.
It two or more destinations are selected for
Real Time Transmission, the Real Time
Transmission setting will be reset.
It two or more destinations are selected for
Priority Transmission, the Priority
Transmission setting will be reset.
When 2in1 Transmission is selected, Auto Size
is selected as the zoom ratio.
Useful Tip
When [Quality/Reduction] is selected, you can
then set [Quality], [Reduction], [Contrast], and
[Scan Area].
Touch [Enter].
Check the details of the settings made and
make sure that you have made the correct
settings.

Chapter 8

4016P411CA

13
14

Users Choice and FAX Input

4016P412CA

15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter].

8-32
2. Settings for FAX Input

Modifying and Deleting Facsimile


Programs

For how to show the [FAX Program] key, see


Selecting FAX Input. p.8-9

Touch [FAX Program].

Select the item to be modified or deleted and


make the necessary changes.
Touching [Del.] will delete the facsimile
program currently selected.

4016P391CB

Select the one-touch key (or facsimile


program key) to be modified or deleted.

4016P414CA

Useful Tip
When [Del.] is touched, you will be prompted to
answer [Yes] or [No]. If you are sure to delete
the program, touch [Yes].

4016P413CA

Useful Tip
Touch the appropriate index tab, [], [], or
[Index List] to select the one-touch key to be
modified or deleted.

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter].

8-33
2. Settings for FAX Input

Registering Relay Groups


Programming the receiving station (final destination) as a relay group is convenient when this machine is
used as a relay station in relay transmissions. Up to five relay groups can be registered. The group number
can range from [1] through [5]. A maximum of 200 receiving stations can be attached to one group.
* Abbreviated numbers are used to register destinations in a relay group. The destination to be registered
as a relay group must be preprogrammed as abbreviated dialing or in a one-touch key.

Registering

For how to show the [Relay Group] key, see


Selecting FAX Input. p.8-9

Touch [Relay Group].

Touch [Abbr. #], enter the abbreviated


number of the destination, then touch
[Enter].

Touch the group number key in which the


destination is to be registered.

Useful Tips
Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the abbreviated
number programmed as abbreviated dialing.
[] or [] can also be used to select the
abbreviated number.
To select multiple destinations, select one
destination and then touch [Abbr. #] to select
the next one.
To confirm the selected final destination, touch
[Detail] and go over what was selected. Touch
[Del.] to delete the displayed destination.

Chapter 8

4016P416CA

Touch [Enter].

Users Choice and FAX Input

4016P417CA
4016P415CB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-34
2. Settings for FAX Input

Self-Abbreviated Dialing
When this machine acts as an originating station to perform relay transmissions, the relay station sets an
abbreviated dialing number to send a relay status report back to you. To receive this relay status report,
program your abbreviated dialing number.
* The relay station must program the number of the original station as abbreviated dialing before relay
transmission is carried out. The originating station then programs the same abbreviated number for the
originating station registered with the relay station as the local abbreviated dialing number (Self-Abbr.
#). After the relay transmission is complete, the relay station sends the relay status report back to the
destination of the abbreviated number that has been selected by the relay station using the local
abbreviated dialing number.

Programming Self-Abbreviated
Number
For how to show the [Self-Abbr. #] key, see
Selecting FAX Input. p.8-9

Touch [Self-Abbr. #].

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the local


abbreviated dialing number and touch
[Enter].

4016P419CA
4016P418CB

Useful Tips
The same number as the abbreviated number
for the originating station registered with the
relay station should be entered.
The number can range from 000 to 499.

8-35
2. Settings for FAX Input

Setting up a Bulletin Board


A bulletin board needs to be set up before any document can be posted on it. The following items must be
programmed.

No.
Select the bulletin board number (1 to 10) to post
up a document. Up to ten bulletin boards can be set
up.

F CODE
An F CODE can be assigned to each bulletin board
to use the bulletin board functions. Up to 20
numeric digits can be programmed using numerals
from 0 through 9 and the symbols of # and .

F CODE Password
A password can be programmed for each bulletin
board number. Up to 20 numeric digits can be
programmed using numerals from 0 through 9 and
the symbols of # and .

Remote Input Check

A title for a bulletin board can be assigned for each


bulletin board number. Each title can consist of up
to 16 characters.

Remote Output Check


Select whether to require a password (ON) or
not (OFF) when downloading a document from
a bulletin board.
The factory setting is OFF.

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

Select whether to require a password (ON) or


not (OFF) when posting up a document on a
bulletin board.
The factory setting is ON.

Title

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-36
2. Settings for FAX Input

Bultn. Procedures

For how to show the [Bultn.] key, see


Selecting FAX Input. p.8-9

Touch [Bultn.].

Make the necessary settings.


<Programming an F CODE>
Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the F CODE and
then touch [Enter]. Using F CODE
p.6-30

4016P422CB
4016P425CA

Select the number assigned to the bulletin


board.

4016P423CA

Touch the key of the item to be programmed.

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful Tips
The same procedure is used to program an F
CODE password.
To re-enter a numeral, use [] or [] to move
the cursor and re-enter the new numeral, or
press the Clear key and re-enter it.
When [Delete] is touched, the character on the
cursor is deleted.
Touching [Cancel] will restore the setting to the
original state (before any setting was made).

<Programming a Title>
Enter the title and touch [Enter]. Entering
Characters p.7-10

4016P424CA
4016P426CA

8-37
2. Settings for FAX Input

<Setting Remote Input Check>


Make the appropriate selection and touch
[Enter].

4016P427CA

Useful Tip
The same procedure applies to Remote Output
Check.

Check the details of the settings made and


make sure that you have made the correct
settings.

4016P428CA

Touch [Enter].

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-38
2. Settings for FAX Input

Registering Account (Account Input)


The machines initial conditions as well as the settings made as the administrator registers the account
with the system can be changed according to how the machine is being used by the account. It is
necessary that the administrator register the account with the system in advance. p.9-12
* Account Input is possible only when 100 Accounts is selected for the Copy Track function. p.9-6
Account 1

Account Name
Set the name of the account. Up to 12 characters
can be used.

Access Code
Program an access code to restrict users.

No.
Program an administration number for each
account.
Account 2

The TSI information to be printed on any


transmitted document can be programmed for each
account. Up to 20 characters can be used.

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

Account TSI

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

F CODE

F CODE
The F CODE is programmed to select the mailbox
that can be used for the account. Up to 20 numeric
digits can be programmed using numerals from 0
through 9 and the symbols of and #.

F CODE Password
The password for the mailbox is programmed. Up
to 20 numeric digits can be programmed using
numerals from 0 through 9 and the symbols
of and #.

Remote Input Check


Select whether to use a password (ON) or not
(OFF) to restrict reception of documents into
mailboxes from other fax machines.
The factory setting is OFF.

8-39
2. Settings for FAX Input

Func.

Priority Screen
<Priority Screen>
Select the default setting of the standby screen
from among Copier, FAX, and Auto.
The factory setting is Copier.
<Priority FAX Screen>
Select the default screen that will appear when the
Fax/Scan key is pressed from among OneTouch, Abbr. #, 10-Key Dialing, and Index,
according to how the machine is used.
The factory setting is One-Touch.

Received Document
Select how a document received in a mailbox is to
be handled, from among Print, Forwrd, Prt &
Forwrd, Save to Box, and Move.
The factory setting is Save to Box.

TX2

TX
<Only when the Automatic Document Feeder is
mounted>
Choose the default setting of the transmission
method between Memory TX and Real-Time.
The factory setting is Memory TX.

TSI
Select whether or not to put TSI on the transmitted
document, or where to put it, either inside or
outside the image area. Options are On The Doc.
(inside the image area), Out of Doc. (outside the
image area), and OFF (not printed).
The TSI is required on all facsimile transmissions.
It is unlawful to turn this feature off. p.viii
The factory setting is On The Doc.

Priority Quality
Select the default setting of the image quality from
among Standard, Fine, Super Fine, Text +
Photo, GSR, and Super GSR.
The factory setting is Standard.

Priority Contrast
Select the default setting of contrast from among
five levels which will be made available by
touching [Lighter], [Normal], or [Darker].
The factory setting is Normal.

Com. Mode
<Only when G3 MULTIPORT SERIES 2 is
mounted>
Choose the default setting of the communication
mode between G3-1 and G3-2.
The factory setting is G3-1.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Output

TX Report
Select the print condition for reports used to verify
the results of fax transmission. Options are
Output ON, If TX Fail, and Output OFF.
The factory setting is If TX Fail.

Report Screen
Select whether to print on the status report a copy
of the transmitted document image (ON) or not
(OFF).
The factory setting is ON.

Chapter 8

TX1

<Only when TX Marker STAMP UNIT is


mounted on the Automatic Document Feeder>
Select whether or not to put TX Marker on the
transmitted document, or where to put it, either at
the bottom edge only or at the top and bottom
edges. Options are Bottom, Top & Bottom,
and OFF (not printed).
The factory setting is OFF.

Users Choice and FAX Input

TX Marker

8-40
2. Settings for FAX Input

Account Input Procedures


Settings for Functions Other Than
Received Document

For how to show the [Account Input] key, see


Selecting FAX Input. p.8-9

Touch [Account Input].

<For Access Code>


Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the access code.

4016P432CA

4016P429CB

Touch [Account 1], [Account 2], [F CODE],


[Func.], [TX 1], [TX 2], or [Output].

<For Remote Input Check>


Select the appropriate option, either ON or
OFF.

4016P430CA

Make the necessary entry or setting.


<For Account Name or Account TSI>
Enter the account name or account TSI. See
Entering Characters. p.7-10

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

Useful Tips
The same procedure applies to No.
To re-enter the number, first press the Clear key.

Useful Tip
The same procedure applies to Priority
Quality, Com. Mode, TX, TSI, TX
Report, and Report Screen.
NOTE for TSI Setting
The TSI is required on all facsimile
transmissions. It is unlawful to turn this feature
off. p.viii

4016P431CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4016P427CA

8-41
2. Settings for FAX Input

<For F CODE>
Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the F CODE.
Using F CODE p.6-30

Useful Tip
The same procedure applies to Priority FAX
Screen.
<For Priority Contrast>
Select Lighter, Normal, or Darker.

4016P425CA

Useful Tips
The same procedure applies to F CODE
Password.
To re-enter a numeral, use [] or [] to move
the cursor and re-enter the new numeral, or
press the Clear key and re-enter it.
When [Delete] is touched, the character on the
cursor is deleted.

4016P436CA

<For TX Marker>
Select Bottom, Top & Bottom, or
OFF.

4016P437CA

Make sure that you have made the correct


entries and settings.

4016P434CB

Chapter 8

Select [Copier], [FAX], or [Auto].

Users Choice and FAX Input

<For Priority Screen>


Select [Priority Screen].

4016P430CA

6
4016P435CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter].

8-42
2. Settings for FAX Input

Settings for Received Document

For how to show the [Account Input] key, see


Selecting FAX Input. p.8-9

Touch [Account Input].

4016P429CB

Select how a document received in a mailbox


is to be handled.
<For Print and Save to Box>
Touch [Save to Box] ([Print]).

4016P440CA

<For Forwrd and Prt & Forwrd>


Touch [Forwrd] ([Prt & Forwrd]).
Touch [One-Touch] or [Abbr. #] and select
the destination to which the received
document is to be forwarded.
Using One-Touch Dialing for
Transmission p.5-6
Using Abbreviated Dialing for
Transmission p.5-7

Touch [Func.].

4016P438CA

Touch [Received Document].

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4016P441CA

4016P439CA

8-43
2. Settings for FAX Input

<For Move>
Touch [Move].
Select the new account to which the
received document is to be moved.

4016P442CA

NOTE
Do not select an account for which Move has
been set for Received Document.
Touch [Enter].
Touch [Enter].

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8-44

Chapter 8

Users Choice and FAX Input

2. Settings for FAX Input

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 9
Using the Admin. Management Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Chapter 9

9-1

9-2

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Chapter 9

1. Settings in Admin. Management


Admin. Management Mode
The Admin. Management mode is for the administrator of your machine. When Admin. Management is
selected, the message prompts you to enter the administrator number.
NOTES
The administrator number is to be programmed by your Tech. Rep. Ask him/her for more details.
The administrator of this machine must remember the administrator number.

Setting Admin. Management

Press the Utility key.

The Touch Panel now shows the detailed


functions that can be set under Admin.
Management.

1166O243EA

Touch [Admin. Management].

4016P143CA

4016P142CA

Enter your administrator code number from


the 10-Key Pad, then touch [Enter].

1166O030AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

9-3

Administrator Set

Fax Trans. Settings

To set Max. Copy Sets and Disable Sleep Mode


functions.

Various fax transmission functions can be set.

Account Meter
Copy Track
To set Account No., Copy Limit, and Access
Code, and clear different counter values.

The number of pages printed and transmitted, and


other machine utilization data, can be checked for
each account.

Input Accounts

Report Settings

Each account (a department or an individual user)


can be registered with the system to allow it to use
the machine according to the settings made and set
up a mailbox.
* This function becomes available only when 100
Accounts is selected in Admin. Management
Mode.p.9-6

Settings for various reports can be made.

Initial Settings
The ID, line, functions, and controls as they relate
to the fax machine can be set.

Fax Recept Settings


Various fax reception functions can be set.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Report Printing
Account information, such as the account name
and specific settings made for communication, can
be checked for each account.

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Functions of Admin. Management

Chapter 9

1. Settings in Admin. Management

9-4

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Chapter 9

2. Settings for Administrator Set


Administrator Set
Max. Copy Sets
You can limit the number of copies or copy sets that can be made per job from 1 to 99.
The initial setting is OFF.

To display [Administrator Set] on the Touch


Panel, follow the steps given in Setting
Admin. Management. p.9-2

Touch [Administrator Set].

Enter the Copy Limit Value from the 10-Key


Pad or touch [OFF].

4016P146CA

4016P144CA

Useful Tip
If you have entered an incorrect number, press
the Clear key, then enter the correct number.

Touch [Max. Copy Sets].

4016P145CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Exit].

9-5

To display [Administrator Set] on the Touch


Panel, follow the steps given in Setting
Admin. Management. p.9-2

Touch [Administrator Set].

Touch [Disable Sleep Mode].

Touch [Yes] or [No].

4016P144CA

4016P147CA

4016P148CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter].

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Disable Sleep Mode


This function can disable the Disable Sleep Mode function. Select whether to enable (Yes) or disable
(No) the Disable Sleep Mode function.
The initial setting is No (disable).

Chapter 9

2. Settings for Administrator Set

9-6

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Chapter 9

3. Settings for Copy Track


Copy Track
This function allows the administrator to keep track of the number of copies made and the number of
pages printed for each account.
Setting options are OFF (no Copy Track), 100 Accounts 1, 100 Accounts 2, and 1000 Accounts.
The factory setting is OFF.
The administrator of this machine is responsible for setting either 100 Accounts or 1000 Accounts.

100 Accounts 1

100 Accounts 2

Entry of the access code allows you to make


copies. The machine can also control the following
data for each account:
Account No.:
Program or change the account number.
Access Code:
Program or change your access code (for a
max. of 100 accounts).
Total Count:
Displays the number on the Total Counter for
each account. You can also clear the counter.
Size Count:
Displays the total on the Size Counter for each
account. You can also clear the counter.
Copy Limit:
You can limit the maximum number of prints
that can be made for each account.

The user can make copies and send a fax without


having to enter its access code. Entry of the access
code permits the control of the following data for
each account.
Account No.:
Program or change the account number.
Access Code:
Program or change the access code (for a
maximum of 100 accounts).
Total Count:
Displays the number on the Total Counter for
each account. It is also possible to clear the
counter.
Size Count:
Displays the total on the Size Counter for each
account. It is also possible to clear the counter.
Copy Limit:
The maximum number of pages to be printed
can be limited for each account.

1000 Accounts
<Di251f/Di351f only>
Entry of the account number allows you to make
copies. The machine can control the following
data for each account:
Total Count:
Displays the number on the Total Counter for
each account. You can also clear the counter.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

9-7

Setting the Copy Track Function

To display [Copy Track] on the Touch Panel,


follow the steps given in Setting Admin.
Management. p.9-2

Touch [Copy Track Functions].

Initialize the Copy Track function data.


Touch [Yes] and [Enter].

4016P153CA

4016P150CA

Touch [Copy Track Mode].

NOTES
When you set or change the Copy Track Mode,
be sure to initialize the Copy Track data.
Initializing the Copy Track data requires that
the machine be started again, which takes some
time.

Touch [Enter].

NOTE
When 100 Accounts 1 is set, program the
account number and access code.
Setting the Account Number p.9-8
Programming the Access Codep.9-9
4016P151CA

Select the desired Copy Track Mode and


touch [Enter].
For example, to keep track of 100 accounts,
touch [100 Accounts 1] and then [Enter].

4016P152CA

Useful Tip
You can have the copy track data printed.
Touch [Copy Track Data].

4017P155EA

Load Letter L paper in the 1st Drawer


lengthwise and press the Start key.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Chapter 9

3. Settings for Copy Track

9-8

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Chapter 9

3. Settings for Copy Track

Setting the Account Number


The account number can be programmed or changed only when 100 Accounts 1 or 100 Accounts 2 is
selected.

To display [Copy Track] on the Touch Panel,


follow the steps given in Setting Admin.
Management. p.9-2

Touch [Copy Track].

Touch the [No.] key of the target account.

4016P156CA

Enter the desired Account Number from the


10-Key Pad. Touch [Enter].

4016P150CA

Touch [Copy Track Data].

1166O030AA

4016P154CA

Select the page number on which the target


account is shown.

NOTES
The account number must be a 4-digit number.
If a new account number is programmed, the
old one will be erased.
If a new account number entered already exists
for another account, the entry will be rejected:
Enter a different account number.
Useful Tips
If you have entered an incorrect number, press
the Clear key, then enter the correct number.
If you want to change or program another
account number, repeat steps 4 through 6.

4017P155EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Exit].

9-9

To display [Copy Track] on the Touch Panel,


follow the steps given in Setting Admin.
Management. p.9-2

Touch [Copy Track].

Touch the [Access Code] key of the target


account.

4016P157CA

6
4016P150CA

Enter the access code from the 10-Key Pad.


Touch [Enter].

Touch [Copy Track Data].

1166O030AA

4016P154CA

Select the page number on which the target


account is shown.

NOTES
The access code must be a 4-digit number.
If a new access code is programmed, the old
one will be erased.
If a new access code entered already exists for
another account, the entry will be rejected:
Enter a different access code.
Useful Tips
If you have entered an incorrect number, press
the Clear key, then enter the correct number.
If you want to program an access code for
another account, repeat steps 4 through 6.

4017P155EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Exit].

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Programming the Access Code


The account code can be programmed or changed only when 100 Accounts 1 or 100 Accounts 2 is
selected.

Chapter 9

3. Settings for Copy Track

9-10

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Chapter 9

3. Settings for Copy Track

Setting a Copy Limit for Each Account


The copy limit can be programmed or changed only when 100 Accounts 1 or 100 Accounts 2 is
selected.

To display [Copy Track] on the Touch Panel,


follow the steps given in Setting Admin.
Management. p.9-2

Touch [Copy Track].

Touch the Copy Limit key of the target


account.

4016P158CA

6
4016P150CA

Enter a number for the Copy Limit from the


10-Key Pad. Then, touch [Enter].

Touch [Copy Track Data].

1166O030AA

4016P154CA

Select the page number on which the target


account is shown.

Useful Tips
If you have entered an incorrect number, press
the Clear key, then enter the correct number.
If you want to set a Copy Limit for another
account, repeat steps 4 through 6.

4017P155EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Exit].

9-11

To display [Copy Track] on the Touch Panel,


follow the steps given in Setting Admin.
Management. p.9-2

Touch [Copy Track].

Touch the counter key (Total Count or Size


Count) of the target account.

4016P159CA

4016P150CA

Press the Clear key and then touch [Enter].

Touch [Copy Track Data].

4016P160CB

4016P154CA

Select the page number on which the target


account is shown.

Useful Tips
To undo a clear operation, press the Interrupt
key.
If you want to clear the counter of another
account, repeat steps 4 through 6.

4017P155EA

Useful Tip
To clear the counters of all accounts at one time
touch [All Counter Reset].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Exit].

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Clearing Counters for Each Account


A counter can be cleared for each account if 100 Accounts 1, 100 Accounts 2, or 1000 Accounts is
selected. It is also possible to clear all counters of all accounts at one time.

Chapter 9

3. Settings for Copy Track

9-12

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Chapter 9

4. Settings for Input Accounts


Input Accounts
When the administrator registers each account (a department or an individual user) with the system by
making various settings uniquely for that account, it allows the account to use the machine according to
the settings made and to set up a mailbox. A unique access code can be programmed for each account to
prevent unauthorized use of this machine by any third party. Up to 100 accounts can be registered, and the
settings made for each account by the administrator can be changed after registration. p.8-38
* This function becomes available only when 100 Accounts is selected in Admin. Management Mode.
p.9-6
Account 1

Account Name
Set the name of the account. Up to 12 characters
can be used.

Access Code
Program an access code to restrict the users.

No.
Program an administration number for each
account.
Account 2

Account TSI
The TSI information to be printed on any
transmitted document can be programmed for each
account. Up to 20 characters can be used.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

F CODE

F CODE
The F CODE is programmed to select the mailbox
that can be used for an account. Up to 20 numeric
digits can be programmed using numerals from 0
through 9 and the symbols of and #.

F CODE Password
The password for the mailbox is programmed. Up
to 20 numeric digits can be programmed using
numerals from 0 through 9 and the symbols
of and #.

Remote Input Check


Select whether to use a password (ON) or not
(OFF) to restrict reception of documents into
mailboxes from other fax machines.
The factory setting is OFF.

9-13

Priority Screen
<Priority Screen>
Select the default setting of the standby screen
from among Copier, FAX, and Auto.
The factory setting is Copier.
<Priority FAX Screen>
Select the default screen that will appear when the
Fax/Scan key is pressed from among OneTouch, Abbr. #, 10-Key Dialing, and Index,
according to how the machine is used.
The factory setting is One-Touch.

Received Document
Select how a document received in a mailbox is to
be handled, from among Print, Forwrd, Prt &
Forwrd, Save to Box, and Move.
The factory setting is Save to Box.

TX2

TX
<Only when the Automatic Document Feeder is
mounted>
Choose the default setting of the transmission
method between Memory TX and Real-Time.
The factory setting is Memory TX.

TSI
Select whether or not to put TSI on the transmitted
document, or where to put it, either inside or
outside the image area. Options are On The Doc.
(inside the image area), Out of Doc. (outside the
image area), and OFF (not printed).
The TSI is required on all facsimile transmissions.
It is unlawful to turn this feature off. p.viii
The factory setting is On The Doc.

TX Marker

TX1

Priority Quality
Select the default setting of the image quality from
among Standard, Fine, Super Fine, Text +
Photo, GSR, and Super GSR.
The factory setting is Standard.

Priority Contrast
Select the default setting of contrast from among
five levels which will be made available by
touching [Lighter], [Normal], or [Darker].
The factory setting is Normal.

<Only when TX Marker STAMP UNIT is


mounted on the Automatic Document Feeder>
Select whether or not to put TX Marker on the
transmitted document, or where to put it, either at
the bottom edge only or at the top and bottom
edges. Options are Bottom, Top & Bottom,
and OFF (not printed).
The factory setting is OFF.

Output

TX Report
Select the print condition for reports used to verify
the results of fax transmission. Options are
Output ON, If TX Fail, and Output OFF.
The factory setting is If TX Fail.

Com. Mode
<Only when G3 MULTIPORT SERIES 2 is
mounted>
Choose the default setting of the communication
mode between G3-1 and G3-2.
The factory setting is G3-1.

Report Screen
Select whether to print on the status report a copy
of the transmitted document image (ON) or not
(OFF).
The factory setting is ON.

Max. Print Page


Limit the number of pages to be printed for each
account in the range from 0 to 999,999.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Func.

Chapter 9

4. Settings for Input Accounts

9-14

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Chapter 9

4. Settings for Input Accounts

Input Accounts Procedures


Settings for Functions Other Than
Received Document

For how to show the [Input Accounts] key,


see Setting Admin. Management. p.9-2

Touch [Input Accounts].

4016P443CA

Select the account for which settings are to


be made or modified.

Make the necessary entry or setting.


<For Account Name or Account TSI>
Enter the account name or account TSI. See
Entering Characters. p.7-10

4016P431CA

<For Access Code>


Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the access code.

4016P432CA
4016P444CA

Touch [Account 1], [Account 2], [F CODE],


[Func.], [TX 1], [TX 2], or [Output].

4016P446CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful Tips
The same procedure applies to No.
To re-enter the number, first press the Clear key.

9-15

<For Priority Screen>


Select [Priority Screen].

4016P434CB
4016P427CA

Select [Copier], [FAX], or [Auto].

Useful Tip
The same procedure applies to Priority
Quality, Com. Mode, TSI, TX Report,
and Report Screen.
NOTE for TSI Setting
The TSI is required on all facsimile
transmissions. It is unlawful to turn this feature
off. p.viii
<For F CODE>
Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the F CODE.
Using F CODE p.6-30

4016P435CA

Useful Tip
The same procedure applies to Priority FAX
Screen.
<For Priority Contrast>
Select Lighter, Normal, or Darker.

4016P425CA

Useful Tips
The same procedure applies to F CODE
Password and Max. Print Page.
If no limit is set for Max. Print Page, enter
0.
To re-enter a numeral, use [] or [] to move
the cursor and re-enter the new numeral, or
press the Clear key and re-enter it.
When [Delete] is touched, the character on the
cursor is deleted.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4016P436CA

Using the Admin. Management Mode

<For Remote Input Check>


Select the appropriate option, either ON or
OFF.

Chapter 9

4. Settings for Input Accounts

9-16

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Chapter 9

4. Settings for Input Accounts

<For TX Marker>
Select Bottom, Top & Bottom, or
OFF.

Settings for Received Document

For how to show the [Input Accounts] key,


see Setting Admin. Management. p.9-2

Touch [Input Accounts].

4016P437CA

Make sure that you have made the correct


entries and settings.

4016P443CA

Touch [Func.].

4016P446CA

Useful Tip
Touch [Del.] to delete the setting made.

4016P447CA

4
7

Touch [Received Document].

Touch [Enter].

4016P448CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

9-17

<For Move>
Touch [Move].
Select the new account to which the
received document is to be moved.

Select how a document received in a mailbox


is to be handled.
<For Print and Save to Box>
Touch [Save to Box] ([Print]).

4016P442CA

4016P440CA

<For Forwrd and Prt & Forwrd>


Touch [Forwrd] ([Prt & Forwrd]).
Touch [One-Touch] or [Abbr. #] and select
the destination to which the received
document is to be forwarded.
Using One-Touch Dialing for
Transmission p.5-6
Using Abbreviated Dialing for
Transmission p.5-7

4016P441CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

NOTE
Do not select an account for which Move has
been set for Received Document.
Touch [Enter].

Touch [Enter].

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Chapter 9

4. Settings for Input Accounts

9-18

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Chapter 9

5. Settings for Initial Settings


Initial Settings
The initial or default settings, which are automatically selected when power is turned ON or the Panel
Reset key is pressed, are set. This function allows the ID, line, functions, control, and other information
that relates to your fax machine to be programmed or modified.
ID

TSI
The TSI information can be programmed when
you notify your name to the destination. Up to 40
characters can be used to specify your name as
TSI. A maximum of the first 20 characters of your
name are printed if the Access Mode key is
pressed and your account is identified with the
specific access code to transmit a document.
The TSI is printed on the leading edge on the
received document. It is also possible to select not
to print the TSI information. p.9-28

Self-ID
If your name and fax number are programmed as
the ID in advance, that ID is printed on the
management report or displayed on the Touch
Panel of the fax machine on the receiving end, so
the recipient will know who sent the document. Up
to 12 characters can be used for an ID.
* The fax machine on the receiving end may not be
able to display Self-ID, depending on the model.
In this case, Self-Telephone Number will be
displayed.

Self-Telephone #1, 2
Your telephone (fax) number can be programmed.
It is notified to the destination.
Numerals of up to 20 digits can be entered as the
Self-Telephone number.
The Self-Telephone number may be printed on
reports at the destination. It is therefore
recommended that the area code be included in it
for easier recognition on the part of the recipient.
* Self-Telephone # is displayed only if the
optional G3 MULTIPORT SERIES 2 in not
mounted.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Line

Line Type (1), (2)


There are two types of telephone line - touch-tone
lines (PB) and dial phone lines (DP10, DP20).
Transmission will be impossible unless your
telephone line type and the setting for this machine
are compatible. Set Line Type to be used for the
machine after checking the telephone line type
being used.
The factory setting is PB.
* Line Type is displayed only if the optional G3
MULTIPORT SERIES 2 is not mounted.

PSTN/Ext Switch 1, 2
Setting can be made for use of this machine over
an ordinary subscriber line connected via a PBX
(private branch exchange).
However, if a PBX is connected, this machine may
not perform correctly for fax transmission.
The factory setting is PSTN.
* PSTN/Ext Switch is displayed only if the
optional G3 MULTIPORT SERIES 2 is not
mounted.

9-19

Default Device Priority


<Priority FAX Screen>
The default screen that will appear when the Fax/
Scan key is pressed can be selected from among
One-Touch, Abbr. #, 10-Key Dialing, and
Index, according to how the machine is used.
The factory setting is One-Touch.

Received Document
The way in which a document received is to be
handled can be set. As well as being printed
immediately, the received documents can be
forwarded to other fax machines, or stored in a box
(reception box) set up in advance for each account.
The factory setting is Print.

Com. Password
The function in which facsimile transmission and
reception is carried out only when passwords that
have been preprogrammed at both the transmitting
and receiving ends agree is called the password
communication (Password Transmission and
Password Reception). The communication
password required for carrying out password
communications can be set.
The factory setting is 00.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Manage

Incomplete TX Hold
Documents that could not be sent (because the
destinaiton line was busy, or for another reason)
can be saved in memory for a period in the range
of 10 min. and 72 hours. It is also possible to select
not to retain documents (Not Held).
The factory setting is 1 HR.

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Func.

Chapter 9

5. Settings for Initial Settings

9-20

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Chapter 9

5. Settings for Initial Settings

Initial Settings Procedures


Settings for Functions Other Than
Received Document

For how to show the [Initial Settings] key,


see Setting Admin. Management. p.9-2

Touch [Initial Settings].

<For Self-Telephone #>


Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the selftelephone number.

4017P452EA
4016P449CA

Touch [ID] ([Line], [Func.], or [Manage]).

4017P450EA

Select the function to be set.


<For TSI and Self-ID>
Enter the TSI or self-ID. See Entering
Characters. p.7-10

Useful Tips
The same procedure applies to Com.
Password and Incomplete TX Hold.
To set the time for Incomplete TX Hold,
select from among 10M., 20M., 30M., 40M.,
50M., 1HR, 2HR, 4HR, 8HR, 12HR, 24HR, and
72HR. [] or [] may be used to select a
longer or shorter retention time. When [Not
Held] is touched, the document which has not
been successfully transmitted is erased
immediately.
To re-enter a numeral, use [] or [] to move
the cursor and re-enter the new numeral, or
press the Clear key and re-enter it. When
[Delete] is touched, the character on the cursor
is deleted.
To program an international code, touch [+]
and enter the applicable country code.
<For Line Type>
Select the line type.

4016P451CA

4016P453CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

9-21

<For PSTN/Ext Switch>


Select [Extension] or [PSTN].

<For Default Device Priority>


Touch [Priority FAX Screen].

4016P454CA

4016P456CA

If [Extension] has been selected, enter the


outgoing number and touch [Enter].

Select the key for the screen that is to be


displayed at first as the FAX screen, from
among [One-Touch], [Abbr. #], [10-Key
Dialing], and [Index].

4016P457CA

4016P455CA

Useful Tips
Touch [PSTN] to connect directly to an
ordinary subscriber line.
Touch [Extension] to connect to the ordinary
subscriber line via a PBX.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter].

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Chapter 9

5. Settings for Initial Settings

9-22

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Chapter 9

5. Settings for Initial Settings

Received Document

For how to show the [Initial Settings] key,


see Setting Admin. Management. p.9-2

Touch [Initial Settings].

<For Forwrd and Prt & Forwrd>


Select [One-Touch] or [Abbr. #].

4016P441CA

4016P449CA

Touch [Func.] and then [Received


Document].

4016P458CA

Select how a document received is to be


handled.
<For Print>

4016P459CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Specify the destination to which the


received document is to be forwarded.
<For Save to Box>

4016P440CA

9-23

4016P442CA

NOTE
Do not select an account for which Move has
been set for Received Document under Input
Accounts.

Touch [Enter].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Using the Admin. Management Mode

<For Move>
Select the account to which the received
document is to be moved, or enter the
account number.

Chapter 9

5. Settings for Initial Settings

9-24

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Chapter 9

6. Settings for FAX Recept Settings


FAX Recept (Reception) Settings
This function allows the administrator to set the various fax reception functions.
RX 1

Reception Mode
The reception mode for the fax machine can be
selected, either Auto or Manual.
The factory setting is Auto.

No. of RX Call Rings


The number of times the telephone rings before
automatic reception is activated can be set in the
range from once to nine times.
The factory setting is once (1 T.).

RX 2

Second Dial
The factory setting is OFF.
RX 3

Password Reception
Select whether to use the password reception
(ON) or not (OFF).
The factory setting is OFF.

RX Time Stamp
Select whether or not to print the reception time/
date on the received document, or where to put it,
either inside or outside the image area. Options are
On The Doc. (inside the image area), Out of
Doc. (outside the image area), and OFF (not
printed).
The factory setting is OFF.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

9-25

Unselectable Cassette
Long Document
Setting can be made whether to reduce
(Reduction) or cut off (Cut Off) a document
received that is longer than the size of the print
paper.
Select Reduction if the image is to be reduced or
Cut Off if the excess part of the image may be
cut off.
The factory setting is Reduction.

Reduction
The reduction ratio can be selected in the range
from 60% to 100% only if Reduction has been
selected for how to handle long documents.
The factory setting is 60%.

Cut Off Length


The cut-off length can be selected in the range
from 0 mm to 24 mm only if Cut Off has been
selected for how to handle long documents.
The factory setting is 20 mm.

Paper 1

If no paper matching up to TX Doc.


Size?
Use Paper Priority or Cassette Priority as the
basis for selecting another paper when the
currently selected paper runs out.
The factory setting is Paper Priority.

Print Paper Select


Choose how to select the paper size when a fax is
received, either Standard, Width Priority, or
Constant Width Mode.
The factory setting is Standard.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Designate a paper source to be excluded from the


possible choices, such as a source containing OHP
transparencies or recycled paper, when the
machine is set to select an appropriate paper
source automatically.
The paper source will not be used for fax reception
if it has been designated for special paper, even
when it is not selected for Unselectable Cassette.
Special Paper Setting p.3-6
Paper 2

2in1 Receive
Selection can be made whether to use 2in1
Reception (ON) or not (OFF).
The factory setting is ON.

Rotation Print
Select whether to use Rotation Print or not, and if
used, whether the document is to be sorted or not.
The factory setting is Sort OFF (Rotation
ON).

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Long Doc

Chapter 9

6. Settings for FAX Recept Settings

9-26

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Chapter 9

6. Settings for FAX Recept Settings

FAX Recept Settings Procedures

For how to show the [FAX Recept Settings]


key, see Setting Admin. Management.
p.9-2

Touch [FAX Recept Settings].

Select the function to be set.


<For Reception Mode>
Touch the appropriate key.

4016P467CA

4016P465CA

Touch [RX 1] ([RX 2], [RX 3], [Paper], or


[Long Doc]).

Useful Tip
The same procedure applies to Password
Reception, If no paper matching up to TX Doc.
size?, Print Paper Select, 2in1 Receive,
Rotation Print, and Long Document.
<For No. of RX Call Rings>
Using the 10-Key Pad, set the number of
times the telephone rings before automatic
reception is activated.

4016P466CB

4016P468CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

9-27

4016P469CA

Select where to print the reception time/


date on the received document.

4016P470CA

4016P471CA

Useful Tips
Touching [] or [] will select 60%, 65%,
80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 100%
for the reduction ratio.
Use the same procedure to set Cut Off
Length.
Touching [] or [] will select 0 mm, 8
mm, 12 mm, 14 mm, 18 mm, 20
mm, or 24 mm for the cut-off length.
If the document is still longer than the print
paper when reduced by the maximum reduction
ratio, it will be divided when printed instead of
being reduced.
<For Unselectable Cassette>
Select the paper source to be excluded from
the possible choices.

4017P472EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter].

Using the Admin. Management Mode

<For Reduction>
Enter the reduction ratio from the 10-Key
Pad or using [] or [].

<For RX Time Stamp>


Touch [G3].

Chapter 9

6. Settings for FAX Recept Settings

9-28

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Chapter 9

7. Settings for FAX Trans. Settings


FAX Trans. Settings
This function allows the administrator to set the various fax transmission functions.
TX Set 1

Priority Quality
Select the default setting for Image Quality that is
returned to after each operation is completed, from
among Standard, Fine, Super Fine, Text +
Photo, GSR, and Super GSR.
The factory setting is Standard.

Priority Contrast
Select the default setting for Contrast that is
returned to after each operation is completed, from
among Lighter, Normal, and Darker.
The factory setting is Normal.

Com. Mode
<Only when G3 MULTIPORT SERIES 2 is
mounted>
Select the default setting for the communication
mode, either G3-1 or G3-2.
The factory setting is G3-1.

TX Set 2

TX
<Only when the Automatic Document Feeder is
mounted>
Choose the default setting of the transmission
method between Memory TX and Real-Time.
The factory setting is Memory TX.

TSI
Select whether or not to put TSI on the transmitted
document, or where to put it, either inside or
outside the image area. Options are On The
Doc., Out of Doc., and OFF.
The TSI is required on all facsimile transmissions.
It is unlawful to turn this feature off. p.viii
The factory setting is On The Doc.

Password TX
Select whether to use password transmission
(ON) or not (OFF).
The factory setting is OFF.

TX Marker
<Only when TX Marker STAMP UNIT is
mounted on the Automatic Document Feeder>
Select whether or not to put TX Marker on the
transmitted document, or where to put it, either at
the bottom edge only or at the top and bottom
edges. Options are Bottom, Top & Bottom,
and OFF (not printed).
The factory setting is OFF.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

9-29

Relay-Station Print
Select whether to print a document at the relay
station (ON) or not (OFF) when Relay
Transmission is performed.
The factory setting is ON.

Line Selection
<Only when G3 MULTIPORT SERIES 2 is
mounted>
Choose whether to select the line automatically
(Auto) or specify it manually (Select).
The factory setting is Auto.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Using the Admin. Management Mode

TX Set 3

Chapter 9

7. Settings for FAX Trans. Settings

9-30

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Chapter 9

7. Settings for FAX Trans. Settings

FAX Trans. Settings Procedures

For how to show the [FAX Trans. Settings]


key, see Setting Admin. Management.
p.9-2

Touch [FAX Trans. Settings].

Select the function to be set.


<For Priority Quality>
Touch the appropriate key.

4016P475CA

4016P473CA

Touch [TX Set 1] ([TX Set 2] or [TX Set 3]).

Useful Tips
The same procedure applies to Priority
Contrast, Com. Mode, TX, TSI,
Password TX, TX Marker, Relay-Station
Print, and Line Selection.
When Select is chosen for Line Selection,
be sure to specify the line for each
transmission.
NOTE for TSI Setting
The TSI is required on all facsimile
transmissions. It is unlawful to turn this feature
off. p.viii

4017P474EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter].

9-31

Machine utilization status (number of pages printed, number of pages transmitted) can be checked on the
screen for each account.
* Account Meter permits checking of the machine utilization status only when 100 Accounts is selected
for Copy Track.

For how to show the [Account Meter] key,


see Setting Admin. Management. p.9-2

Touch [Account Meter].

Check the tally counts.

4016P479CA

5
4016P477CA

Select the account.

4016P478CA

NOTE
Touching [All Clear] will erase the tally counts
of all accounts.
Useful Tip
To enter an account number, touch [No.] and
then, using the 10-Key Pad, enter the account
number.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter].

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Account Meter Procedures

Chapter 9

8. Settings for Account Meter

9-32

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Chapter 9

9. Settings for Report Settings


Report Settings
This function allows the administrator to set the various functions concerning reports.

TX Report

Report Screen

Select the print condition for reports used to verify


the results of fax transmission. Options are
Output ON, If TX Fail, and Output OFF.
The factory setting is If TX Fail.

Activity Report

Select whether to print on the status report a copy


of the transmitted document image (ON) or not
(OFF).
The factory setting is ON.

Memory Clear Report

Select whether to automatically print the activity


report every 50 communications (Output ON) or
not (Output OFF).
The factory setting is Output ON.

Select whether to print a report to show that some


documents have been cleared due to a power
failure or other reason (Output ON) or not
(Output OFF).
The factory setting is Output ON.

Report Settings Procedures

For how to show the [Report Settings] key,


see Setting Admin. Management. p.9-2

Touch [Report Settings].

<For TX Report>
Touch the appropriate key.

4016P482CA

4016P480CA

Select the function to be set.

Useful Tip
The same procedure applies to Report Screen,
Activity Report, and Memory Clear Report.

4016P481CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter].

9-33

This function allows the administrator to print and check the various kinds of account information for
each account, including the account name and specific settings made for communication.

Account Count Report

Account List

The tally data for each account, including the


number of pages printed and transmitted, can be
printed for confirmation.
* This function is available only when 100
Accounts 1 or 100 Accounts 2 is selected for
Copy Track.

The various kinds of account information for each


account, including the account name and specific
settings made for communication, can be printed
for confirmation.
* This function is available only when 100
Accounts 1 or 100 Accounts 2 is selected for
Copy Track.

Setting List
The information on the settings made for this
machine can be printed for confirmation.

Report Printing Procedures

For how to show the [Report Printing] key,


see Setting Admin. Management. p.9-2

Touch [Report Printing].

<For Account Count Report>


Touch [Account Count Report].

4016P485CA

4016P483CA

Useful Tip
The same procedure applies to Account List
and Setting List.

Select the function to be set.

4016P484CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter].

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Report Printing

Chapter 9

10. Settings for Report Printing

9-34

Using the Admin. Management Mode

Chapter 9

10. Settings for Report Printing

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 10
When a Message Appears

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

10-1

10-2

1. When the Message Replenish paper. Appears

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

When the drawer currently selected for use runs


out of paper, the message shown on the left
appears and the machine interrupts the current
print cycle. The drawer whose indicator is lit up on
the Touch Panel has run out of paper.
Add paper by using the following procedure.

4017P161EA

Adding paper
1st Drawer

Slide out the 1st Drawer.


Paper take-up roller

Load the paper stack into the drawer so that


its front side faces up.

4015O068AB

NOTE
Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper
take-up roller with your hands.

4015O070AB

NOTE
The paper should be
loaded no higher than
(Max. Level Indicator).

Press the Paper Lifting Plate down until it


locks.

4015O202AA

Pinch the tabs on the Edge Guide and


Trailing Edge Stop and slide them to the
exact size of the paper loaded.

4015O069AB

4015O071AC

NOTE
Properly align the Edge Guide with the end face
of the paper stack.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-3
1. When the Message Replenish paper. Appears

Touch the key of the desired paper size.

Chapter 10

Slide the drawer back in.

4015O072AB

NOTE
Perform steps 6 through 11 if the size or type of
paper has been changed.

4017P164EA

Select the 1st Drawer.

Touch [OHP/Card].

4017P165EA
4017P162EA

10

Touch [Mode Change].

Select the type of paper and touch [Enter].

4017P166EA
4017P163EA

Useful Tips
Select Card when labels have been loaded.
Up to 50 sheets of card, OHP transparencies,
or labels can be loaded.

11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Touch [Enter].

When a Message Appears

10-4
1. When the Message Replenish paper. Appears

<Calling up a Paper Size from Memory>


Touch [Custom Size] on the screen given in step
8.

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

<Using Nonstandard Size Paper>


Touch [Custom Size] on the screen given in step
8.

4017P167EA

Touch [] or [] to set the whole number for X


and touch [X]. The underline moves to the
fractional part. Set the fraction with [] or [].
Now the value for X has been fixed.

4017P167EA

Select the desired memory paper size key from


among the two.

4017P169EA

4017P168EA

Do the same for [Y].


Touch [Enter].
NOTES
When the Clear key is pressed, it clears the size
figure entered.
When the 16-9/16 inch to 17 inch is set for X,
the maximum size that can be set for Y becomes
11 inch.
When the 11-1/6 inch to 11-11/16 inch is set for
Y, the maximum size that can be set for X
becomes 16-1/2 inch.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful Tip
Paper size can be stored in memory. p.10-8
Touch [Enter].

10-5
1. When the Message Replenish paper. Appears

2nd Drawer

Paper Feed Unit PF-119

<Di251f/Di351f only>
Slide out the drawer.

Paper take-up roller


Paper take-up roller

4015O073AB
4015O073AB

NOTE
Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper
take-up roller with your hands.

Press the Paper Lifting Plate down until it


locks.

NOTE
Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper
take-up roller with your hands.

Press the Paper Lifting Plate down until it


locks.

4015O074AB
4015O074AB

Load the paper stack into the drawer so that


its front side faces up.

Load the paper stack into the drawer so that


its front side faces up.

4015O075AB
4015O075AB

NOTE
NOTE

The paper should be


loaded no higher than
(Max. Level Indicator).

The paper should be


loaded no higher than
(Max. Level Indicator).

4015O145AA

4015O145AA

Slide the drawer back in.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Slide the drawer back in.

Chapter 10

Slide out the drawer.

When a Message Appears

10-6
1. When the Message Replenish paper. Appears

Paper Feed Unit PF-118

Slide out the drawer.

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

Paper take-up roller

Place the paper stack onto the Paper Plate so


that its front side faces up.

4015O077AB
4015O080AB

NOTE
Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper
take-up roller with your hands.

NOTE
The paper should be
loaded no higher than
(Max. Level Indicator).

Press the Paper Lifting Plate down until it


locks.

4015O145AA

Slide the Edge Guide to the exact size of the


paper loaded again.

4015O078AB

Position the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge


Stop at the exact size of the paper used.
4015O081AC

NOTE
Properly align the Edge Guide with the end face
of the paper stack.

Slide the drawer back in.

4658U012AA

1
2

4015O082AB

4
3
4015O079AB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-7
1. When the Message Replenish paper. Appears

Slide out the drawer.

Load another paper stack into the left half of


the drawer, front side face up. Press the
leading edge of the paper stack tightly up
against the left side of the drawer.

4015O083AB

Load the paper stack into the right half of the


drawer, front side face up. Press the leading
edge of the paper stack tightly up against the
right side of the drawer.

4015O085AB

NOTE
Max.

The paper should be


loaded no higher than
(Max. Level Indicator).

1145O555KA

Slide the drawer back in.

4015O084AB

NOTE
Max.

The paper should be


loaded no higher than
(Max. Level Indicator).

1145O555KA

4015O086AB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

Large Capacity Cabinet

10-8
1. When the Message Replenish paper. Appears

Memorize Paper Size

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

You can store some of the most frequently used paper sizes in memory for repeated use afterwards.

Touch [Paper].

Touch [Custom Size].

4016P067CA

4017P167EA

Select the 1st Drawer.

4017P162EA

Touch [Memorize Paper Size].

4017P171EA

Touch [Mode Change].

Touch [] or [] to set the whole number


for X and touch [X]. The underline moves to
the fractional part. Set the fraction with []
or []. Now the value for X has been fixed.

4017P163EA

4017P172EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-9

Touch [] or [] to set the whole number


for Y and touch [Y]. The underline moves to
the fractional part. Set the fraction with []
or []. Now the value for Y has been fixed.

4017P173EA

Touch [1] or [2].

4017P174EA

NOTE
When a new paper size is stored, the old one is
cleared.

Touch [Enter].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

When a Message Appears

NOTES
When the Clear key is pressed, it clears the size
figure entered.
When the 16-9/16 inch to 17 inch is set for X,
the maximum size that can be set for Y becomes
11 inch.
When the 11-11/16 inch to 11-11/16 inch is set
for Y, the maximum size that can be set for X
becomes 16-1/2 inch.

Chapter 10

1. When the Message Replenish paper. Appears

10-10

2. When the Message Please add toner. Appears

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

The message shown on the left appears when toner


is low.
Replace the Toner Bottle as soon as possible once
the message has appeared.
You can still make copies, but the image density
will become lighter and lighter.

4016P175CA

When toner has run out, the message shown on the


left appears and you can no longer start a new print
cycle.
Replace the Toner Bottle with a new one by
following the procedure given below.

4016P176CA

Replacing the Toner Bottle

Open the Toner Bottle Cover.

4015O110AB

Gently pull out the used bottle.

4015O111AB

NOTE
If the Toner Bottle Cover is opened while the
bottle is turning, the bottle may be locked in
place. If this happens, close the cover, wait for
the bottle to stop, and try again.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-11
2. When the Message Please add toner. Appears

Sharply tap the new Toner Bottle against a


desk or other hard surface four to five times.
Then turn the Toner Bottle upside down and
tap it the same way again.

With the UP marking on top, insert and


push the bottle into position.

4015O112AC
1166O228AA

Shake the new Toner Bottle well and turn it


over lengthwise five times.

NOTE
Push the bottle in up to the black line.

Close the Toner Bottle Cover.

1166O095AA

NOTE
To prevent toner caking, make sure to carry out
the procedure above to agitate the toner well
before installing the Toner Bottle.

With the Seal on the Toner Bottle facing up,


slowly peel off the Seal as illustrated.

1139O1390A

NOTE
Be careful, some toner may puff out from the
bottle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4015O113AB

NOTES
Use ONLY the specified toner for this machine.
Using any other toner could result in trouble.
Do not throw away, but keep, the used Toner
Bottle, which will be collected by your Tech.
Rep.
Be careful not to drop the Toner Bottle from 40
inch or more height. It may damage the Toner
Bottle.
When the Toner Bottle Cover is closed, the
machine automatically starts replenishing the
supply of toner. During this period, do not
attempt to turn OFF the Power Switch or open
the Right Door.
Toner Replenisher
Use the Toner Replenisher function available
from the Utility Mode if the image is light
immediately after the Toner Bottle has been
replaced with a new one. p.7-19

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

10-12

3. When the Message Stapler empty. Appears


The message shown on the left appears when the
staples are running low.

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

Reload the Staple Cartridge with a new clip by


following the procedure given below.

4017P178EA

Reloading the Staple Cartridge


Finisher FN-109

Holding the Grip, slide the Finisher away


from the machine.

Pull the Staple Cartridge out to the front.


Stapler 1

Stapler 2
4015O087AB

Open Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN7] at the


right side of the Finisher.

NOTE
Two Staple Cartridges are mounted in Finisher
FN-109. Be sure to remove the specific Staple
Cartridge that is indicated in the message on the
Touch Panel.

5
FN7

4002O178AA

Press the portion marked with Push of the


Staple Cartridge to pop up the upper part of
the cartridge and remove the empty clip.

4015O088AB

Turn the dial to the left to move the Staple


Units toward the center.

4002O177AB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4002O362AA

10-13
3. When the Message Stapler empty. Appears

Load a new clip into the Staple Cartridge and


return the upper part of the cartridge back
again.
Gently peel off the Stopper Seal.
Chapter 10

Stopper Seal

Insert the new Staple Cartridge until a click


is heard.

4002O182AA

Close Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN7].

FN7

4015O089AB

Slide the Finisher back against the machine.

4015O090AB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

When a Message Appears

4002O363AA

10-14
3. When the Message Stapler empty. Appears

Finisher FN-110
Holding the Grip, slide the Finisher away
from the machine.

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

Load a new staple clip into the Staple


Cartridge and carefully peel off the Stopper
Seal.

Stopper Seal

4015O087AB
4002O181AC

Turn the dial to the left to move the Staple


Unit toward the center.

Insert the new Staple Cartridge until a click


is heard.

4002O177AB
4002O183AD

Pull the Staple Cartridge out to the front.

Slide the Finisher back against the machine.

Stapler 1
4002O179AD

Remove the empty staple clip from the


Staple Cartridge.

4002O180AB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4015O090AB

10-15
3. When the Message Stapler empty. Appears

Mailbin Finisher

Load a new staple clip into the Staple


Cartridge and carefully peel off the Seal.
Stopper Seal

4015O120AA
4002O341AA

Slide out the Staple Unit.

Insert the Staple Cartridge into the Staple


Unit until it clicks into place.

1166O127AA

While pressing down the green lever, pull out


the Staple Cartridge.

1166O130AB

Align the arrows and firmly push the Staple


Unit down into the well.

1166O128AA

Remove the empty staple clip from the


Staple Cartridge.

4002O340AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1166O131AB

Press and turn the knob to lock the cover.

4015O121AA

Chapter 10

Press and turn the knob and open the cover at


the rear of the Finisher.

When a Message Appears

10-16

4. When the Message Please change Imaging Unit. Appears

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

When the life span of the Imaging Unit nears its


end, the message Please change Imaging Unit.
appears on the Touch Panel. Change the Imaging
Unit as soon as possible once the message has
appeared.
Change the Imaging Unit following the procedure
given below.

4016P177CA

NOTE
Do not throw away, but keep, the used Imaging
Unit, which will be collected by your Tech. Rep.

Changing the Imaging Unit

Unlock Lock Release Lever [R1] and open


the Right Door.

Holding the green hooks at the front and rear


of the Imaging Unit, carefully pull out the
old Imaging Unit. Then, holding the handle
on the top side of the Imaging Unit, take the
Imaging Unit out of the machine.

4015O114AA

CAUTION

4015O115AB

NEVER touch the electrical contacts inside the


Right Door and underneath the Imaging Unit,
as an electrostatic discharge may damage the
machine.
Electrical Contacts

1166O264AB

Shake well the new Imaging Unit


horizontally. Align the green labels on the
new Imaging Unit with those on the rails in
the machine and then slide the Imaging Unit
into the machine.

1166U058AA

4015O116AB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-17
4. When the Message Please change Imaging Unit. Appears

Holding the green hooks of the Imaging


Unit, push the Imaging Unit all the way into
the machine until a click is heard.

Chapter 10

When a Message Appears

4015O117AB

Close the Right Door.

4015O118AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-18

5. When the Message Misfeed detected. Appears


If a paper misfeed occurs during a print cycle, the
message shown on the left will appear and the
machine will stop running.

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

Clear the misfed sheet of paper according to the


procedure given below.

4016P179CB

Misfeed Location Displays


Different procedures are used to clear a misfed sheet of paper depending on the location. First, isolate the
location, then clear the misfeed according to the procedure applicable to the misfeed occurring at that
particular location. Please refer to the corresponding pages.
Duplexing Document Feeder p.10-22
Automatic Document Feeder p.10-23

Shift Tray
p.10-33
Job Tray
p.10-32
Finisher FN-109
p.10-24
Finisher FN-110
p.10-27
Mailbin Finisher
p.10-30

Duplex Unit
p.10-21
Manual Bypass
Tray
p.10-21

4015P180AD

Machine p.10-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-19
5. When the Message Misfeed detected. Appears

Misfeed Clearing Procedures

Unlock Lock Release Lever [R1] and open


the Right Door.

CAUTION
DO NOT touch any parts except paper
as the Fusing Unit and its surrounding
areas are extremely hot.
Do not touch anything but the paper to
prevent you from getting burned.

When a Message Appears

Gently pull out the sheet of paper.

4015O114AA

NOTE
Do not take out the Imaging Unit at this time.

CAUTION
NEVER touch the electrical contacts inside the
Right Door and underneath the Imaging Unit,
since an electrostatic discharge may damage the
machine.

4015O126AB

Close the Upper Right Door.

Electrical Contacts

4015O180AA
1166O264AB

Gently pull out the sheet of paper.

Push the Lock Release Lever [R2] and open


the Upper Right Door.

R2

4015O124AB

4015O125AB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 10

Machine

10-20
5. When the Message Misfeed detected. Appears

Close the Right Door.

Gently pull out the sheet of paper.

Chapter 10

When a Message Appears

4015O118AA

Open the Side Panel.


4015O183AA

10

Close the Side Panel.

4015O181AA

Turn the green dial to feed the paper to a


position at which it can be easily removed.
<Only when the Paper Feed Unit is
mounted>

4015O184AA

11

4015O123AB

4015O182AA

<Only when the Large Capacity Cabinet is


mounted>

Slide out the drawer being used and remove


the paper stack left in it.

12

Reload the paper stack in the drawer and


slide the drawer back into the machine.

4015O122AA

4015O185AB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-21
5. When the Message Misfeed detected. Appears

Manual Bypass Tray

Duplex Unit

Open the Duplex Unit Cover.

4015O128AB
4015O114AA

CAUTION

Gently pull out the sheet of paper.

NEVER touch the electrical contacts inside the


Right Door and underneath the Imaging Unit,
since an electrostatic discharge may damage the
machine.
Electrical Contacts

4015O129AB

Unlock Lock Release Lever [R1] and open


the Right Door.
Pull out the sheet of paper.

1166O264AB

Gently pull out the sheet of paper.

4015O130AB

Close the Duplex Unit Cover and the Right


Door.

4015O127AA

Close the Right Door.

4015O131AB

4015O118AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

Unlock Lock Release Lever [R1] and open


the Right Door.

10-22
5. When the Message Misfeed detected. Appears

Duplexing Document Feeder

When a Message Appears

Raise Misfeed Clearing Guide [F1].

Chapter 10

Remove the original from the Original Glass


and lower the Duplexing Document Feeder.

F1

1166O256AA

Unload the originals from the Duplexing


Document Feeder and gently pull out the
original.

1166O147AA

1166O148AA

1166O144AB

Open Misfeed Clearing Guide [F2] and


gently pull out the original.

Close [F1] and [F2].

Reload the originals as instructed on the


Touch Panel.

F2
4015O244AA
1166O145AB

Raise the Duplexing Document Feeder. Open


the Document Turnover/Feed Unit Guide
Plate, and gently pull out the original from
the unit.

1166O146AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-23
5. When the Message Misfeed detected. Appears

Automatic Document Feeder

Open the Misfeed Clearing Guide.

Pulling up the Document Feed Tray, gently


pull out the original.

1166O151AA

Unload the originals from the Automatic


Document Feeder.

4015O188AA

Bring the tray and Misfeed Clearing Guide


back down.

4015O186AA

Raise the Automatic Document Feeder and


gently pull out the original.
4015O189AA

Reload the originals as instructed on the


Touch Panel.

1166O152AB

Open the Document Feed Tray.


4015O044AB

4015O187AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

10-24
5. When the Message Misfeed detected. Appears

Finisher FN-109
Holding the Grip, slide the Finisher away
from the machine.

Open Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN8], and


remove the sheet of paper.

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

FN8

4015O087AB

Open the Transport Unit Cover and remove


the sheet of paper.

4002O248AB

Close Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN7].

FN7

4015O091AC

NOTE
Be careful about a protrusion on the backside of
the Transport Unit Cover. It can hurt you!

4015O089AB

Open the Front Door [FN4].

Slowly close the Transport Unit Cover until a


click is heard.

FN4

4015O093AB

Turn Knobs [FN5] together to feed the sheet


of paper.

4015O092AC

Open Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN7] on the


right side of the Finisher.

FN5

FN5

FN7
4002O250AB

4015O088AB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-25
5. When the Message Misfeed detected. Appears

12

Close Front Door [FN4].

Open Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN3], and


remove the sheet of paper.

Chapter 10

FN4
FN3
4015O097AB

10

Open Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN1].

13

Close Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN1].

FN1
FN1
4015O095AB
4015O098AB

CAUTION
Metallic parts inside Misfeed Clearing
Guide [FN1] are very hot.
Do not touch anything but the paper to
prevent you from getting burned.

11

14

<Only when the Option Tray is fitted>


Open the Option Tray cover.

Open Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN2], and


remove the sheet of paper.

4015O099AB

Remove the sheet of paper.

FN2
4015O096AB

4015O100AB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

When a Message Appears

4015O094AB

10-26
5. When the Message Misfeed detected. Appears

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

Close the Option Tray cover.

4015O101AB

15

Open Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN6], and


remove the sheet of paper.

FN6

4002O254AB

16

Slide the Finisher back against the machine.

4015O090AB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-27
5. When the Message Misfeed detected. Appears

Finisher FN-110

Open Front Door [FN4].


Chapter 10

Holding the Grip, slide the Finisher away


from the machine.

FN4

4015O093AB
4015O087AB

Open the Transport Unit Cover and remove


the sheet of paper.

Turn Knobs [FN5] together to feed the sheet


of paper.

FN5

FN5

4002O250AB

4015O091AC

NOTE
Be careful about a protrusion on the backside of
the Transport Unit Cover. It can hurt you!

Slowly close the Transport Unit Cover until a


click is heard.

Close Front Door [FN4].

FN4

4015O094AB

Open Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN1].

4015O092AC

FN1

Open Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN7], and


remove the sheet of paper.

FN7

4015O095AB

CAUTION

4002O248AB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Metallic parts inside Misfeed Clearing


Guide [FN1] are very hot.
Do not touch anything but the paper to
prevent you from getting burned.

When a Message Appears

10-28
5. When the Message Misfeed detected. Appears

Remove the sheet of paper.

Open Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN2], and


remove the sheet of paper.

Chapter 10

4015O100AB

When a Message Appears

FN2
4015O096AB

10

Close the Option Tray cover.

Open Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN3], and


remove the sheet of paper.

4015O101AB

FN3

13
4015O097AB

11

Close Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN1].

Open Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN6], and


remove the sheet of paper.

FN6

FN1
4002O254AB

4015O098AB

12

14

Slide the Finisher back against the machine.

<Only when the Option Tray is fitted>


Open the Option Tray cover.

4015O090AB

4015O099AB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-29

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

5. When the Message Misfeed detected. Appears

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-30
5. When the Message Misfeed detected. Appears

Mailbin Finisher

Holding the Grip, slide the Mailbin Finisher


away from the machine.

Open Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN2].

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

FN2

4015O105AA

4015O102AB

CAUTION

Open the Transport Unit Cover and remove


the sheet of paper.

Metallic parts inside Misfeed Clearing


Guide FN2 are very hot.
Do not touch anything but the paper to
prevent you from getting burned.

If Hole Punch has been set, turn the Hole


Punch Adjustment Dial ten times downward.
Pull out the sheet of paper.

4015O103AB

NOTE
Be careful about a protrusion on the backside of
the Transport Unit Cover. It can hurt you!

Slowly close the Transport Unit Cover until a


click is heard.
4015O106AA

Open Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN3] and


pull out the sheet of paper.

4015O104AB

FN3
4015O107AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-31
5. When the Message Misfeed detected. Appears

Close Misfeed Clearing Guides [FN3] and


[FN2].

11

Remove the sheet of paper.

Chapter 10

Raise Top Offset Tray cover [FN1].

12

Open Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN5], and


remove the sheet of paper.

FN1
FN5

1166O173AA

Pull out the sheet of paper and lower Top


Offset Tray cover [FN1].

FN1

1166O185AA

13
14

Close Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN4].


Slide the Mailbin Finisher back against the
machine.

1166O174AA

10

Open Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN4] at the


right side of the Finisher.

FN4

1166O183AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4015O109AA

NOTE
If a misfeed has occurred in the Staple Unit, see
Clearing the Staple Misfeed. p.10-34

When a Message Appears

1166O184AA
4015O108AA

10-32
5. When the Message Misfeed detected. Appears

Job Tray
Unlock Lock Release Lever [R1] and open
the Right Door.

Open the Job Tray cover.

Gently pull out the sheet of paper.

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

4015O132AB

4015O114AA

CAUTION
NEVER touch the electrical contacts inside the
Right Door and underneath the Imaging Unit,
since an electrostatic discharge may damage the
machine.
Electrical Contacts

4015O133AB

Close the Job Tray cover.

1166O264AB

Push the Lock Release Lever [R2] and open


the Upper Right Door.

4015O134AB

Close the Upper Right Door and then close


the Right Door.

R2

4015O125AB

CAUTION
DO NOT touch any parts except paper
as the Fusing Unit and its surrounding
areas are extremely hot.
Do not touch anything but the paper to
prevent you from getting burned.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4015P191AA

10-33
5. When the Message Misfeed detected. Appears

Shift Tray
Unlock Lock Release Lever [R1] and open
the Right Door.

Open the Shift Tray cover.

4015O132AB

4015O114AA

Gently pull out the sheet of paper.

CAUTION
NEVER touch the electrical contacts inside the
Right Door and underneath the Imaging Unit,
since an electrostatic discharge may damage the
machine.
Electrical Contacts
4015O133AB

Close the Shift Tray cover.

1166O264AB

Push the Lock Release Lever [R2] and open


the Upper Right Door.
4015O134AB

Close the Upper Right Door and then close


the Right Door.

R2

4015O125AB

CAUTION
DO NOT touch any parts except paper
as the Fusing Unit and its surrounding
areas are extremely hot.
Do not touch anything but the paper to
prevent you from getting burned.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4015O191AA

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

10-34

6. When the Message Cannot staple. Appears


Clearing the Staple Misfeed
If a staple misfeed occurs, the message shown on
the left will appear.

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

Clear the staple misfed according to the procedure


given below.

4016P181CA

Finisher FN-109/Finisher FN-110

Holding the Grip, slide the Finisher away


from the machine.

Turn the dial to the left to move the Staple


Unit (two Stapler Units in FN-109) toward
the center.

4015O087AB
4002O177AB

<Only when Finisher FN-109 is mounted>


Open Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN7] on the
right side of the Finisher.

Pull the Staple Cartridge out to the front.


<Finisher FN-109>
Stapler 1

FN7

Stapler 2

4002O178AA

4015O088AB

NOTE
Two Staple Cartridges are mounted in Finisher
FN-109.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-35
6. When the Message Cannot staple. Appears

<Finisher FN-110>

Chapter 10

<Finisher FN-110>

Stapler 1

Push up the guide of the Staple Cartridge and


pull out one staple sheet.

<Only when Finisher FN-109 is mounted>


Close Misfeed Clearing Guide [FN7].

FN7

4002O256AC

Return the guide to its original position.

4015O089AB

Slide the Finisher back against the machine.

4002O257AB
4015O090AB

Insert the Staple Cartridge until a click is


heard.
<Finisher FN-109>

4002O182AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

NOTE
If the Finisher does not staple after clearing the
staple misfeed, call your Tech. Rep.

When a Message Appears

4002O183AD

4002O179AD

10-36
6. When the Message Cannot staple. Appears

Mailbin Finisher

When a Message Appears

Raise Top Offset Tray cover [FN1].

Chapter 10

While pressing down the green lever, pull out


the Staple Cartridge.

FN1

1166O173AA
1166O128AA

Pull out the sheet of paper and lower Top


Offset Tray cover [FN1].

Push up the guide of the Staple Cartridge and


pull out one staple sheet.

FN1

1166O174AA
1166O177AA

Press and turn the knob to open the cover at


the rear of the Mailbin Finisher.

Return the guide to its original position.

4015O120AA

1166O178AA

Slide out the Staple Unit.

Insert the Staple Cartridge into the Staple


Unit until it clicks into place.

1166O127AA

1166O130AB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-37
6. When the Message Cannot staple. Appears

Align the arrows and firmly push the Staple


Unit down into the well.

Chapter 10

10

Press and turn the knob to lock the cover.

4015O121AA

NOTES
After a staple misfeed has been cleared, the
Staple Unit will run idly a maximum of about
10 stapling sequences without actually driving
staples into paper. What the Staple Unit is
doing is feeding a staple sheet to the required
position.
If the Mailbin Finisher does not staple after
clearing the staple misfeed, call your Tech. Rep.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

When a Message Appears

1166O131AB

10-38

7. When a Size Error Message Appears


Clearing a Size Error

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

If the paper size setting for a drawer does not agree with the actual paper size loaded in the drawer, the
size error message shown below may appear.

4016P183CA

4016P182CA

NOTE
Call your Tech. Rep. when the size error occurs on the Paper Feed Unit PF-119.
<1st Drawer>

Slide out the 1st Drawer.

Select the 1st Drawer.

4015O135AB

Slide the drawer back in.


4017P162EA

Touch [Mode Change].

4015O072AB

4017P163EA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-39
7. When a Size Error Message Appears

Select the exact size of the paper actually


loaded in the drawer.

4017P164EA

Touch [OHP/Card].

4017P165EA

Select the type of paper and touch [Enter].

4017P166EA

Useful Tip
Select Card when labels have been loaded.

Touch [Enter].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

10-40

8. Replacing the TX Marker Stamp (Spare TX Marker STAMP)


How to Replace the TX Marker Stamp (Spare TX Marker STAMP)

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

Replace the TX Marker Stamp with a spare when the marking gets faint.
* Call your Tech. Rep. when the marking made by the TX Marker Stamp gets faint.

Replacing the Marker Stamp

Lift the Document Feed Tray upright.

Push down the Document Feed Tray.

4015O179AA
4015O119AA

Pushing the used Marker Stamp downward,


pull it out.

1166O137AA

Insert a new Marker Stamp in place.

1166O135AA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-41

9. When the Message A malfunction was detected. Appears

IMPORTANT
When you call your Technical Representative, be
sure to give him or her the malfunction code
being shown on the Touch Panel.
4012P227CA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

When a Message Appears

When a screen as shown on the left appears on the


Touch Panel, it indicates that the machine has
developed a malfunction.
Call your Technical Representative.

Chapter 10

When the message A malfunction was detected. appears

10-42

10. What Does Each Message Mean?


What does each message mean?

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

Message

Cause

Action

A malfunction was detected.


Please call your technical
representative and provide code:

The machine has malfunctioned


and is unable to make prints.

Call and inform your Technical


Representative of the code being
shown on the Touch Panel.

Please add toner.

Toner has run out and the


machine is unable to make
copies.

Replace the Toner Bottle with a


new one.
(When the Message Please add
toner. Appears p.10-10)

The Imaging Unit needs to be


changed.
Call your technical
representative.

The PC Drum has reached its


service life and the machine is
unable to make further copies.

Call your Technical


Representative.

Stapler empty. Replace Staple


The staples have run out.
Cartridge or cancel Staple mode.

The machine needs service.

Replace the Staple Cartridge with


a new one. (When the Message
Stapler empty. Appears
p.10-12)
Call your Technical
Representative.

4016P225CA

Return the following number of


originals to Document Feeder.

After a misfed sheet of paper has Add the number of originals


been cleared, you need to reload indicated to the bottom of the
remaining stack and reload.
the originals fed out onto the
Document Exit Tray onto the
Document Feed Tray.

Image data has caused memory The machine is unable to scan the Wait until a print cycle is run or
overflow. Your copy job has been data for lack of memory.
erase a reserved job to make room
canceled.
for new data.
This mode cannot be selected
with the

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

You have set two functions that


conflict with each other.

Cancel either one of the two


functions.

10-43

11. When This Type of Copy is Produced


When this type of copy is produced

The image is too light.

Action

The exposure level for the Auto


Exposure mode is set at Lighter.

Change the setting of Default


Copy Output Levels of Users
Choice.p.8-4
Or, cancel the Auto Exposure mode
and select Manual Exposure to
adjust the exposure level to obtain a
darker image. p.3-42

The exposure level for the Manual


Exposure mode is set at Lighter.

Touch [Darker] as necessary to


obtain a darker image. p.3-42

1074O108

You have been making copies from The machine needs more toner.
a photo or an original with a large Replenish toner by using Toner
dark area.
Replenisher of Utility Mode.
p.7-19

The image is too dark.

The Toner Bottle has just been


replaced.

The machine needs more toner.


Replenish toner by using Toner
Replenisher of Utility Mode.
p.7-19

The Touch Panel shows the


message Please add toner.

Change the Toner Bottle with a new


one. p.10-10

The paper is damp.

Change the paper. p.10-2

The exposure level for the Auto


Exposure mode is set at Darker.

Change the setting of Default


Copy Output Levels of Users
Choice. p.8-4
Or, cancel the Auto Exposure mode
and select Manual Exposure to
adjust the exposure level to obtain a
lighter image. p.3-42

The exposure level for the Manual


Exposure mode is set at Darker.

Touch [Lighter] as necessary to


obtain a lighter image. p.3-42

The Original Glass surface is dirty.

Wipe the Original Glass clean with


a soft dry cloth. p.11-10

The original is not held tightly


against the Original Glass.

Place the original in position so that


it is held tightly against the Original
Glass. p.2-30

1074O109

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 10

Possible Cause

When a Message Appears

Symptom

10-44
11. When This Type of Copy is Produced

Symptom

Possible Cause

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

The copy is blurry.

Action

The paper is damp.

Change the paper. p.10-2

The Original Glass surface is dirty.

Wipe the Original Glass clean with


a soft dry cloth. p.11-10

The Original Pad or Document


Transport Belt is dirty.

Wipe the Original Pad clean with a


soft cloth dampened with alcohol.
p.11-11

1074O110

The copy has lines.

1139O1670A
The original is very thin or highly
The copy has dark specks or transparent.
spots.
The original is 2-sided.

1074O111

The edge of the copy is


dirty.

Place a blank sheet of paper over


the original. p.2-31
The information on the back side of
a 2-sided, thin original may be
slightly reproduced on the copy. Set
the machine into the Manual
Exposure mode and, using
[Lighter], make the exposure level
lighter. p.3-42

The Original Pad is dirty.

Wipe the Original Pad clean with a


soft cloth dampened with alcohol.
p.11-11

You have selected a paper size


larger than the original.
(When the zoom ratio is set at full
size 1.000)

Select the same paper size as the


original. p.3-5
Or, use Auto Size to enlarge the
copy to the appropriate size.
p.3-12

The original is not placed in the


correct position.
(When the zoom ratio is set at full
size 1.000)

Select the same paper size as the


original. Or, reload the paper in the
same direction as the original.
p.3-5

The reduction ratio selected is not


in accord with the paper size.
(When doing manual reduction
copying.)

Select the zoom ratio according to


the paper size. p.3-12
Or, use Auto Size to reduce the
copy to the appropriate size.
p.3-12

1074O112

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-45
11. When This Type of Copy is Produced

The originals may not be suitable


for use in the document feeder.
1074O113

Action
Place the original correctly on the
Original Glass against the Original
Width Scale. p.2-30
Or, load it in the document feeder
correctly along the Document
Guide Plates. p.2-27
Raise the document feeder and
place the originals on the Original
Glass one at a time, instead of using
the document feeder. p.2-30

Something is sticking to the


Wipe the Original Glass clean with
Original Glass (When the document a soft dry cloth. p.11-10
feeder is used).
The document guides are not
positioned along the edges of the
paper.

Slide the document guides against


the edges of the paper.

Curled paper was loaded into the


paper drawer.

Flatten the paper before loading it.

* Call your Technical Representative if these procedures do not correct the problem.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 10

Possible Cause

When a Message Appears

Symptom

The image on the copy is not The original is not placed in the
aligned properly.
correct position.

10-46

12. The Machine is not Functioning as Designed


The machine is not functioning as designed

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

Symptom
The Touch Panel shows
nothing.

Possible Cause

Action

Is only the Start key lit green?

The machine is in the Energy Save


Mode, LCD Back-light Off, or
Sleep mode.
Press any key on the control panel
to let the machine exit the mode.

Is the Power Switch turned ON?

Turn the Power Switch ON.

The Display Contrast Knob is


turned to the excessively light or
dark position.

Viewing the Touch Panel, adjust the


Display Contrast Knob as
necessary.

The Start key does not light Is your Access Code or Access
green.
Number entered?

Enter your Access Code or Access


Number by following the procedure
given in Entering the Access
Code/Access Number. p.2-35

4016P492CA

No copies are fed out when


the Start key is pressed.

Control panel keys do not


respond.

The machine has developed a


malfunction.

Check the Touch Panel and take


action according to the message on
the panel.

The machine has just been turned


ON and is warming up.

It takes the machine about 60 to 70


seconds to be ready to make copies
after it has been turned ON. Please
wait.

The Interrupt key LED is lit.

The machine is in the interrupt


mode. Press the Interrupt key to
cancel the interrupt mode.

1166O260AA

The machine is not activated The power cord is left unplugged.


when the Power Switch is
turned ON.
The room circuit breaker is open.

Plug the power cord into the power


outlet.
Close the room circuit breaker.

* If these procedures do not correct the problem, turn OFF the Power Switch, unplug the power cord from
the power outlet, and contact your Technical Representative.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10-47

13. Facsimile is not Functioning Properly


Transmission Failures
Action

Is the document too heavy?

Send the document by placing it on


the Original Glass.p.2-30

Is the document too thin or too


small?

Send the document by placing it on


the Original Glass.p.2-30

Is the Original Glass dirty?

Wipe the surface of the Original


Glass clean with a dry soft
cloth.p.11-10

The document is not


scanned slantways.

Are the Document Guide Plates


Slide the Document Guide Plates to
pressed tightly up against the edges the exact size of the document.
of the document?
p.2-27

The image received at the


destination is not clear.

Is the document placed in position? Position the document


correctly.p.2-27
Is the Original Glass dirty?

Wipe the surface of the Original


Glass clean with a dry soft cloth.
p.11-10

Is the text on the document too


faint?

Adjust contrast for scanning.


p.5-10

Is there a program with the line


condition or the fax machine at the
destination?

Use this machine to make a copy


for check. If a good, clear copy is
produced, try sending it again.

A blank sheet is printed at


the destination.

Is the document loaded face down


(if the document feeder is being
used)?

Load the document face up and try


sending it again.p.2-27

Automatic transmission is
not possible.

Is the number wrong?

Reconfirm the number.

Are you calling a number dedicated Reconfirm the number.


to telephone use?
Is there a problem at the destination Contact the destination.
(such as paper out, set to disable
automatic reception, and power
OFF)?

TX Marker is too faint


(option).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Has the life of the Marker Stamp


been reached?

Replace the Spare TX Marker


STAMP. p.10-40

Chapter 10

The document is not


scanned.

Possible Cause

When a Message Appears

Symptom

10-48
13. Facsimile is not Functioning Properly

Reception Failures

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

Symptom
The received image is
unclear.

A blank sheet is printed on


the reception paper.

Possible Cause

Action

Is the recommended paper being


used?

Use recommended paper.p.11-2

Is the paper damp?

Change paper with one fresh from


its package.p.10-2

Is the amount of toner sufficient?

Change the Toner Bottle.


p.10-10

Is the Toner Bottle placed in


position?

Reposition the Toner Bottle.


p.10-10

Is there a program with the line


condition or the fax machine at the
destination?

Use this machine to make a copy


for check. If a good, clear copy is
produced, try sending it again.

Is the amount of toner sufficient?

Change the Toner Bottle.


p.10-10

Has the sender placed the document Check the sender.


reverse way between the front and
back side?
Automatic reception is not
possible.

Black lines are evident on


the received paper.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Is manual reception set?

Select automatic reception.


p.9-26

Is memory full?

If paper has run out, add paper and


print documents stored in memory.
p.10-2

Is a report being printed?

Wait until printing of the report is


complete.

Is a message being shown?

Follow the instructions to reset the


alarm. p.10-42

Is there a program with the line


condition or the fax machine at the
destination?

Use this machine to make a copy


for check. If no black lines occur on
the copy, ask the sender to re-send.

10-49
13. Facsimile is not Functioning Properly

Telephone Problems
Action

Nothing is heard through the The Extra Telephone set cord is not Connect the Extra Telephone set
handset.
connected to the main unit.
cord to the main unit.
The line cord is not connected to the Connect the line cord to the main
main unit.
unit.
Line is engaged.

Try again once the line is free.

No ringer sound is heard


after dialing.

The appropriate type of line is not


set.

Reset the appropriate type of


line.p.9-18

It is difficult to hear when


on-hook dialing is used.

The Monitor Sound Volume is set


too low.

Increase the Monitor Sound


Volume. p.7-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 10

Possible Cause

When a Message Appears

Symptom

10-50

When a Message Appears

Chapter 10

13. Facsimile is not Functioning Properly

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 11

Chapter 11

11-1

Miscellaneous

Miscellaneous

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

11-2

1. Specifications
Specifications

Miscellaneous

Chapter 11

Di200f/Di251f/Di351f
Type
Platen Type
Photo conductor
Copying System
Developing System
Fusing System
Resolution
Types of Original
Kinds of Paper

Copy Paper Size

Paper Feeding System

Capacity

Warm-Up Time
First Copy
Copy Speed
(Approx. copies/min)
Zoom Ratios

Multiple Copies
Exposure Control
Lost Image
Power Requirements
Power Consumption
Dimensions

Weight
DC resistance
Ni-MH battery for memory
back-up
Standard memory

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Di200f
Di251f
Di351f
Console/Desk Top Copier
Stationary
OPC
Electrostatic Dry Powdered Image Transfer to Plain Paper
Micro-Toning High-Grade System
Lamp-Heated Roller
600dpi
Sheets, Books and other three-dimensional objects
Maximum Original Size : 1117 L
Maximum Original Weight : 6-1/2 lb
Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper
Exclusive paper : Card (24-1/4 lb to 41-3/4 lb), OHP transparencies, Labels
*Exclusive paper can only be used for the 1st Drawer and Manual Bypass Tray.
1st Drawer
: 1117 L to 5-1/28-1/2
Width
: 3-9/16 to 11-11/16 Length
: 5-1/2 to 17
* When the Length (16-9/16 to 17) is set for [X], the maximum Width size that
can be set for [Y] becomes 11.
When the Width (11-1/16 to 11-11/16) is set for [Y], the maximum Length size
that can be set for [X] becomes 16-1/2.
Manual Bypass Tray :
Crosswise : 3-9/16 to 11-11/16 Lengthwise : 5-1/2 to 17
2nd Drawer
: 1117 L to Letter
1st Drawer Plain paper (20 lb), recycled paper
: 250 sheets
Exclusive (Card, OHP transparencies, Labels)
: 50 sheets
Manual Bypass Tray Plain paper, Exclusive paper : 1 sheet
2nd Drawer Plain paper (20 lb) : 500 sheets
Plain paper (20 lb):
Max. Paper Size Letter L, 500 sheets, Max. Paper Size 1117 L, 250 sheets
Exclusive paper : Card, OHP transparencies, Label = 10 sheets
60 seconds or less
70 seconds or less
Letter C = 5.9 seconds or less
Letter C = 4.6 seconds or
(Using 1st Drawer)
less (Using 1st Drawer)
1117L:12 LegalL : 14 1117L : 14 LegalL : 17 1117L: 20 LegalL : 23
LetterL :17 LetterC : 20 LetterL : 20 LetterC : 25 LetterL : 28 LetterC : 35
Fixed ratios, Full size: 1:11%
Enlargement ratios : 1.214, 1.294, 1.545, 2.000
Reduction ratios : 0.500, 0.647, 0.733, 0.785, 0.930
Variable ratios
: From 0.250 to 4.000 in 0.001 increments
1 to 99 copies
1 to 999 copies
Auto Exposure Mode, Manual Exposure Mode, Text Mode,
Photo Mode and Text/Photo Mode
Leading Edge, 1/4 Trailing Edge, 1/4 Rear Edge, 1/4 Front Edge, 1/4
AC120~127V, 60Hz
760W10%
950W10%
980W10%
Width : 23-1/2
Width : 23-1/2
Width : 24-1/2
Depth : 27-3/4
Depth : 27-3/4
Depth : 27-3/4
Height : 21-1/4
Height : 25-1/2
Height : 25-1/2
109-1/4 lb
129-1/2 lb
133-1/2 lb
334
Voltage : 4.8V, Capacitance : 650mAh
16MB

32MB

11-3
1. Specifications

Kinds of Original

Original Size
Capacity of Document Feed
Tray
Power Consumption
Dimensions
Weight

Standard Mode
: 1-sided original, 2-sided original
Mixed Original Detection Mode : 1-sided Mixed Original Detection
2-sided Mixed Original Detection
Single Feeding Mode
: 1-sided original
Plain paper
1-sided original
: 13-1/4 lb to 29-1/4 lb
2-sided original, Mixed Original Detection : 16 lb to 24 lb
Single Feeding
: 9-1/4 lb to 53-1/4 lb
1-sided, 2-sided original, Single Feeding : 1117 L to 5-1/28-1/2 L
Mixed original Detection
: 1117 L to Letter
50 sheets (20 lb)
60W or less
Width : 23-3/4 Depth : 19-3/4
26-1/2 lb or less

Height : 4-1/4

Automatic Document Feeder AF-9


Document Feeding System
Kinds of Original
Original Size
Capacity of Document Feed
Tray
Power Consumption
Dimensions
Weight

Standard Mode : 1-sided original


Single Feeding
: Plain paper (10-3/4 lb to 21-3/4 lb)
Multiple Feeding : Plain paper (14 lb to 21-3/4 lb)
1-sided, 2-sided Original: 1117 L to 5-1/28-1/2
Mixed Original Detection: 1117 L to 5-1/28-1/2 C
1-sided, 2-sided Original: 70 sheets (14 lb to 21-3/4 lb)
Mixed Original Detection: 50 sheets (14 lb to 21-3/4 lb)
60W or less
Width : 21-1/4 Depth : 19-1/2 Height : 3-3/4
13-1/4 lb

Large Capacity Cabinet PF-117


Kinds of Paper
Paper Size
Capacity
Power Consumption
Dimensions
Weight

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper


A4C, Letter C, B5C
2,500 sheets (20 lb)
45W or less
Width : 21 Depth : 22-1/4 Height : 11-1/4
36-3/4 lb

Miscellaneous

Document Feeding System

Chapter 11

Duplexing Document Feeder AFR-17

11-4
1. Specifications

Paper Feed Unit PF-118/PF-119

Miscellaneous

Chapter 11

Kinds of Paper
Paper Size
Capacity
Power Consumption
Dimensions
Weight

Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper


1117 L to Letter
500 sheets (20 lb)
16.8W or less
Width : 21 Depth : 22-1/4 Height : 5
18-3/4 lb

Duplex Unit AD-15


Kinds of Paper
Copy Paper Size
Power Consumption
Dimensions
Weight

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper


1117 L to 5-1/28-1/2
21W
Width : 2-1/4 Depth : 16-1/4 Height : 10-1/4
4 lb

11-5
1. Specifications

Paper Size

Capacity

Stapling
Punching
Shift Position
Power Consumption
Dimensions
Weight
Accessories

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Top Offset Tray, Bottom Offset Tray


Non-Sort Mode, Sort Mode, Group Mode, Staple Mode, Hole Punch Mode
<Top Offset Tray>
Non-Sort Mode
Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper
Exclusive paper : Card (24-1/4 lb to 41-3/4 lb), OHP transparencies, Labels
Hole Punch Mode
Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper, Card (24-1/4 lb to 41-3/4 lb)
<Bottom Offset Tray>
Sort Mode, Group Mode
Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper
Punch Mode
Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper
Staple Mode
Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper
<Top Offset Tray>
1117 L to 5-1/28-1/2
<Bottom Offset Tray>
1117 L to Letter
<Top Offset Tray>
Plain paper (20 lb) : Letter C, 250 sheets ; Other Size, 150 sheets
(Height : up to 1-1/2)
Exclusive paper
: Card, OHP transparencies, Labels = 20 sheets each
<Bottom Offset Tray>
Plain paper (20 lb) : Letter or smaller, 3,000 sheets
: Larger than Legal, 1,500 sheets
Acceptable paper size
: 1117 L to Letter
Acceptable number of copies : 2 to 50 sheets
Acceptable paper size
: 1117 L, Letter C
Punch Hole
: 2-Hole or 3-Hole
1-1/4
63W or less
Width : 21-1/4 Depth : 24-3/4 Height : 38-1/2
86-1/2
Staple Cartridge, 5,000 staples/cartridge 2

Miscellaneous

Types of Trays
Modes
Kinds of Paper

Chapter 11

Finisher FN-109

11-6
1. Specifications

Finisher FN-110

Miscellaneous

Chapter 11

Types of Trays
Modes
Kinds of Paper

Paper Size

Capacity

Stapling
Shift Position
Power Consumption
Dimensions
Weight
Accessories

Top Offset Tray, Bottom Offset Tray


Non-Sort Mode, Sort Mode, Group Mode, Staple Mode
<Top Offset Tray>
Non-Sort Mode
Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper
Exclusive paper : Card (24-1/4 lb to 41-3/4 lb), OHP transparencies, Labels
<Bottom Offset Tray>
Sort Mode, Group Mode
Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper
Staple Mode
Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper
<Top Offset Tray>
1117 L to 5-1/28-1/2
<Bottom Offset Tray>
1117 L to Letter
<Top Offset Tray>
Plain paper (20 lb) : LetterC, 250 sheets ; Other Size, 150 sheets
(Height : up to 1-1/2)
Exclusive paper
: Card, OHP transparencies, Labels = 20 sheets each
<Bottom Offset Tray>
Plain paper (20 lb) : Letter or smaller, 1,000 sheets
: Larger than Legal, 500 sheets
Acceptable paper size
: 1117 L to Letter
Acceptable number of copies : 2 to 30 sheets
1-1/4
63W or less
Width : 21-1/4 Depth : 24-3/4 Height : 38-1/2
78-1/4 lb
Staple Cartridge, 3,000 staples/cartridge 1

Option Tray JS-100


Types of Trays
Kinds of Paper
Paper Size
Capacity
Dimensions
Weight

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Third Tray
Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper
1117 L to 5-1/28-1/2 L
Plain paper (20 lb) : Leter C, 100 sheets ; Other Size, 50 sheets (Height : up to 1)
Width : 13-1/2 Depth : 20-3/4 Height : 5-3/4
3-3/4 lb

11-7
1. Specifications

Paper Size

Capacity

Stapling
Punching
Shift Position
Power Consumption
Dimensions
Weight
Accessories

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Top Offset Tray, Bottom Offset Tray, Mailbins (5 bins)


Non-Sort Mode, Sort Mode, Group Mode, Staple Mode, Hole Punch Mode
<Top Offset Tray>
Non-Sort Mode
Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper
Exclusive paper : Card (24-1/4 lb to 41-3/4 lb), OHP transparencies
Hole Punch Mode
Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper
<Bottom Offset Tray>
Sort Mode, Group Mode, Hole Punch Mode
Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper
Staple Mode
Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper
<Mailbin>
For Printing: Sort Mode, Group Mode and Hole Punch Mode
Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper
<Top Offset Tray>
1117 L to 5-1/28-1/2
<Bottom Offset Tray>
1117 L to Letter
<Mailbin>
1117 L to 5-1/28-1/2 L
<Top Offset Tray>
Plain paper (20 lb) : Letter C, 500 sheets ; Other Size, 250 sheets
(Height : up to 2-3/4)
Exclusive paper
: Card = 20 sheets, OHP transparencies = 10 sheets
<Bottom Offset Tray>
Plain paper (20 lb) : Letter or smaller, 1000 sheets
: Larger than Legal, 500 sheets
<Mailbin>
Plain paper (20 lb) : Letter C, 200 sheets/bin; Other size, 100 sheets/bin
Acceptable paper size
: 1117 L to Letter
Acceptable Number of copies : 2 to 50 sheets
Acceptable paper size
: 1117 L, Letter C
Punch Hole
: 3-Hole (2-Hole is an option)
1-1/2
63W or less
Width : 25-3/4 Depth :24-1/2 Height : 38-3/4
105-3/4 lb
Staple Cartridge, 5000 staples/cartridge 1

Miscellaneous

Types of Trays
Modes
Kinds of Paper

Chapter 11

Mailbin Finisher FN-504

11-8
1. Specifications

Job Tray JS-201


Type
Number of Trays

Miscellaneous

Chapter 11

Modes
Kinds of Paper

Paper Size
Capacity

Power Consumption
Dimensions
Weight

Stationary
2 Trays : Job Tray is the 1st tray.
Copier exit tray becomes the 2nd tray.
Non-Sort Mode, Sort Mode and Group Mode
<First Tray>
Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper
<Second Tray>
Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper
Exclusive paper : Card (24-1/4 lb to 41-3/4 lb), OHP transparencies
Width : 3-9/16 to 11-11/16, Length : 5-1/2 to 17(1117 L to 5-1/28-1/2)
<First Tray>
Plain paper (20 lb) : Letter C, 100 sheets; Other Size, 50 sheets (Height : up
to 1)
<Second Tray>
Plain paper (20 lb) : Letter C, 250 sheets; Other Size, 150 sheets (Height : up
to 1-3/4)
Exclusive paper
: Card, OHP transparencies = 20 sheets
26W or less
Width : 19-1/4 Depth : 19-3/4 Height : 8
10-1/4 lb (Including Mounting Brackets)

Shift Tray OT-102


Shifting System
Shift Home Position
Modes
Kinds of Paper

Paper Size

Capacity

Shift Position
Power Consumption
Dimensions
Weight

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Tray moved by a pulse motor


Rear of unit
Non-Sort Mode, Sort Mode and Group Mode
<Non-Sort Mode>
Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb), recycled paper
Exclusive paper : Card (24-1/4 lb to 41-3/4 lb), OHP transparencies
<Sort Mode, Group Mode>
Plain paper (16 lb to 24 lb)
<Non-Sort Mode>
Width : 3-9/16 to 11-11/16
Length : 5-1/2 to 17(1117 L to 5-1/28-1/2)
<Sort Mode, Group Mode>
Width : 5-1/2 to 11-11/16
Length : 5-1/2 to 17(1117 L to 5-1/28-1/2)
Plain paper (20 lb)
: Letter C, 250 sheets; Other Size, 150 sheets (Height : up
to 2-1/4)
Exclusive paper
: Card, OHP transparencies = 20 sheets
1-1/2
26W or less
Width :19-1/4 Depth : 22 Height : 8
15 lb (Including Mounting Brackets)

11-9

Miscellaneous

Chapter 11

1. Specifications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

11-10

2. Care of the Copier


Cleaning
Touch Panel

Housing

Panel Cleaning Mode enables you to clean the


Touch Panel when the Main Switch is ON.
Press the Utility key and touch [User
Management].

Miscellaneous

Chapter 11

Wipe the surface of the housing clean with a soft


cloth dampened with alcohol.

4015O137AB

4016P125CA

Original Glass

Touch [Panel Cleaning].

1
2

Raise the Original Cover.


Wipe the surface of the Original Glass clean
with a soft, dry cloth.
Original Glass

4012P130CB

Wipe the surface of the Touch Panel clean


with a soft, dry cloth.
1166O099AA

<Only when the Automatic Document


Feeder is mounted>
Original Glass

1166O098AA

Press the Panel Reset key after cleaning.

NOTE
To avoid damage to the touch panel, NEVER
use a glass cleaner or any detergent.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4015O256AA

11-11
2. Care of the Copier

Document Transport Belt


Open the Document Feeder.

Raise the Document Feeder or Original


Cover.

Wipe the surface of the Document Transport


Belt clean with a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol.

Wipe the surface of the Original Pad clean


with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.

4015O138AA
4015O141AA

Hold the Document Transport Belt at both


edges and pull it to the left to expose a fresh
surface.

4015O139AB

Wipe the fresh surface clean using the soft


cloth dampened with alcohol.

4015O138AA

Repeat these steps until the entire surface of the


Belt is wiped clean.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Miscellaneous

Chapter 11

1
2

Original Pad

11-12

3. Function Combination Matrix

Function Set Last

Basic
Zoom

Copy

Basic

Chapter 11
Miscellaneous

Auxiliary

Density

Orig.

Others

Auto Paper
Paper Feed Unit
1st Drawer (OHP)
1st Drawer (Card)
Paper
1st Drawer (Plain)
Manual Bypass Tray (OHP)
Manual Bypass Tray (Card)
Manual Bypass Tray (Plain)
Auto Size
Zoom
Optional Zoom
X/Y Zoom
Non-Sort
Sort
Finishing Group
Staple
Hole Punch
Single-Sided
Double-Sided
Book
Orig.
Single-[2in1]
Double-[2in1]
Mixed Orig. Detection
Single-Sided
Double-Sided
Single-[2in1]
Double-[2in1]
Copy
Single-[4in1]
Double-[4in1]
Booklet Creation
Original Direction
Margin
Auto Exposure
Manual Exposure
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
File Margin
Edge/Frame Erase
Page Insertion
Cover Mode
OHP Interleaving
Image Repeat
Separate Scan
Distribution #
SADF Mode
Interrupt

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Orig. Copy
Orig.
Copy

Finishing

Auto Paper
Paper Feed Unit
1st Drawer (OHP)
1st Drawer (Card)
1st Drawer (Plain)
Manual Bypass Tray (OHP)
Manual Bypass Tray (Card)
Manual Bypass Tray (Plain)
Auto Size
Optional Zoom
X/Y Zoom
Non-Sort
Sort
Group
Staple
Hole Punch
Single-Sided
Double-Sided
Book
Single-[2in1]
Double-[2in1]
Mixed Orig. Detection
Single-Sided
Double-Sided

Paper

Function Set First

Function Combination Matrix

F
F

F
F
F
F
F
E
E



























E E
E E










A A
A A
A A
G A H

A A
A A
A A
A A


A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
E E E E
E E E E






E E E E E

A
A
A

A
A
A
A

A
A
A
A
A
A
E
E

E
E

E
E

A A A
A A A
A A A

E E
A A A
-

E
E

E
E

E
E

E
E




G


G




B







C







E E E
E E E




E
E

C
D

E
E

E E E E E E E E E E E E

E
E

E
E

11-13

3. Function Combination Matrix

Copy
Auxiliary

Density

Orig.

Others

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Auxiliary

Others

E
E

E
E

E
E

E
E

E
E

E E E E E

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

D
D
D

E
E

E
E

E
E

E
E

E
E

E
E

E
E

E
E

E
E

E
E

E E E E E E E E E E E

D
D
D
D
D

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

E
E

E
E

- D
-

Chapter 11

Auto Paper
Paper Feed Unit
1st Drawer (OHP)
1st Drawer (Card)
Paper
1st Drawer (Plain)
Manual Bypass Tray (OHP)
Manual Bypass Tray (Card)
Manual Bypass Tray (Plain)
Auto Size
Zoom
Optional Zoom
X/Y Zoom
Non-Sort
Sort
Finishing Group
Staple
Hole Punch
Single-Sided
Double-Sided
Book
Orig.
Single-[2in1]
Double-[2in1]
Mixed Orig. Detection
Single-Sided
Double-Sided
Single-[2in1]
Double-[2in1]
Copy
Single-[4in1]
Double-[4in1]
Booklet Creation
Original Direction
Margin
Auto Exposure
Manual Exposure
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
File Margin
Edge/Frame Erase
Page Insertion
Cover Mode
OHP Interleaving
Image Repeat
Separate Scan
Distribution #
SADF Mode
Interrupt

Density

Miscellaneous

Basic

Function Set First

Orig. Copy
Copy

Single-[2in1]
Double-[2in1]
Single-[4in1]
Double-[4in1]
Booklet Creation
Original Direction
Margin
Auto Exposure
Manual Exposure
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
File Margin
Edge/Frame Erase
Page Insertion
Cover Mode
OHP Interleaving
Image Repeat
Separate Scan
Distribution #
SADF Mode
Interrupt

Function Set Last

11-14
3. Function Combination Matrix

Conditions for Combined Functions

Chapter 11

B
C
D
E
F

Miscellaneous

G
H

: The functions can be used in combination with each other.


: The functions cannot be set in combination. (The function set first takes precedence.)
: The functions cannot be set in combination. (The function set last takes precedence.)
: The functions can be set in combination. (The function set first takes precedence.)
: The functions can be set in combination. (The function set last takes precedence.)
: The manual bypass cannot be used with this function. The function set first will be automatically
canceled if a sheet of paper is inserted into the manual bypass tray.
: Sort is automatically reselected.
: Only when Single-sided original to Double-sided copy is selected, the function set first takes
precedence.
: Cannot be used with the Automatic Document Feeder. (The function set first takes priority.)
: Cannot be used with the Automatic Document Feeder. (The function set last takes priority.)
: The copier automatically recalls a default zoom ratio for 2-in-1 Separation and 2-in-1, 4-in-1 or
Booklet Creation copying.
: The combination is possible only when the FN-109 is mounted. When the machine is equipped with
an FN-504, the function set first takes precedence.
: The combination is possible only when the FN-109 is mounted.
If the machine is equipped with the FN-504, a warning is given when manual bypass is specified on
the Touch Panel. If paper is placed on the Manual Bypass Tray, the function set first is canceled.
: Has no bearing.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

11-15

4. Description of Paper Size and Zoom Ratio Table


List of Paper Sizes and Zoom Ratios

Name
LEDGER
1114
COMPUTER
1014
9-1/414
LEGAL
FOOLSCAP
GOVERNMENT LEGAL
FOOLSCAP
FOOLSCAP
FOOLSCAP
FOLIO
8-1/411-3/4
LETTER
GOVERNMENT LETTER
QUARTO
EXECUTIVE
STATEMENT
INVOICE

Size (Metric)
297mm420mm
257mm364mm
210mm297mm
182mm257mm
148mm210mm
128mm182mm
105mm148mm
100mm148mm

Size (Inch)
11-3/4 16-1/2
10 14-1/4
8-1/4 11-3/4
7-1/4 10
5-3/4 8-1/4
5 7-1/4
4-1/4 5-3/4
4 5-3/4

Size (Inch)
11 17
11 14
10-1/8 14
10 14
9-1/4 14
8-1/2 14
8-1/2 13
8 13
8-2/3 13
8-1/4 13
8-1/4 11-3/4
8-1/2 11
8 10-1/2
8 10
7-1/4 10-1/2
5-1/2 8-1/2

Size (Metric)
279mm432mm
279mm356mm
257mm356mm
254mm356mm
236mm356mm
216mm356mm
216mm330mm
203mm330mm
220mm330mm
210mm330mm
210mm301mm
210mm279mm
203mm267mm
203mm254mm
184mm267mm
140mm216mm

Miscellaneous

Name
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
B6
A6
POST CARD

Chapter 11

Paper Sizes

Zoom Ratios (Original Size to Paper Size)


Original Size

A3
297420mm
11-3/416-1/2

A4
210297mm
8-1/411-3/4

A5
148210mm
5-3/48-1/4

A6
105148mm
4-1/45-3/4

B4
257364mm
1014-1/4

B5
182257mm
7-1/410

B6
128182mm
57-1/4

Metric Areas
Paper Size
A4
A5
B4
B5
A5
A6
B5
B6
A3
B4
A6
B6
A4
A3
B4
B5
A4
A5
B5
B6
A4
A5
B5
B6
A3
A5
A6
B6
A3
A4
B4
A6
A4
A5
B4
B5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Zoom Ratio
0.707
0.500
0.866
0.610
0.707
0.500
0.866
0.610
1.414
1.224
0.707
0.866
1.414
2.000
1.733
1.224
2.000
1.414
1.733
1.224
0.816
0.577
0.707
0.500
1.154
0.816
0.577
0.707
1.640
1.154
1.414
0.816
1.640
1.154
2.000
1.414

Original Size

1117
279.4431.8mm

1115
279.4381mm

1114
279.4355.6mm

Legal
8-1/214
215.9355.6mm

Foolscap
8-1/213
215.9330.2mm

Letter
8-1/211
215.9279.4mm

Invoice
5-1/28-1/2
139.7215.9mm

Inch Areas
Paper Size
1114
Legal
Foolscap
Letter
Invoice
1114
Legal
Foolscap
Letter
Invoice
Legal
Foolscap
Letter
Invoice
Foolscap
Letter
Invoice
1117
Letter
Invoice
1117
1114
Invoice
1117
1114

Zoom Ratio
0.823
0.772
0.764
0.647
0.500
0.933
0.772
0.772
0.733
0.500
0.772
0.772
0.772
0.500
0.928
0.785
0.607
1.214
0.846
0.647
1.294
1.076
0.647
1.294
1.272

1117
1114
Legal
Foolscap
Letter

2.000
1.647
1.545
1.529
1.294

Zoom Ratio = Paper Size Original Size


1 Inch = 25.4 mm
1 mm = 0.0394 Inch

11-16

5. Terms and Definitions


Terms and Definitions
Terms
Automatic Document
Feeder

Automatically feeds and scans multiple pages of a document one by one


when they are placed on the feeder.

Batch Transmission

A mailing post to which recipients and time for transmission are


registered. When a mailing post is established in the memory by
registering recipients and time for transmission, a document can be sent
from the post at the registered time. The document can be transmitted to
the recipients at a time late in the night when the call charge is lower, or
transmitted to overseas sales offices just in time for opening.
By using this function the sender can save time and money for
transmission. This is because the sender does not have to do a setting
and resetting for every transmission when there are multiple recipients.
p.8-23

Booklet Document

Bound documents such as books or catalogs. To transmit or copy these


documents, use the book scanner.

Book Scanner

Scans bound documents such as books or catalogs, etc.

Bulletin Board

When a mail box is established in the memory and information is


assigned, the information can be disclosed to anyone who wants to read
it. p.6-19, 8-35

Dialing with 10-Key Pad

Input numbers directly by using the 10-Key Pad.

F CODE

F CODE provides a mailbox function using codes such as Sub-Address


(SUB), Selective Polling (SEP), and Password (PWD) defined in the G3
standard of the International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T). F
CODE enables confidential transmission and bulletin board
communications between facsimiles that support F CODE.

G3 communications

Communications in conformance with the G3 standard, an International


Standard for facsimile communications via an analog line (general
subscriber line).

G3 MULTIPORT SERIES
2

Allows simultaneous communication (transmission and reception) on


both lines.
Example: Transmission/Transmission
Transmission/Reception
Reception/Reception

Chapter 11
Miscellaneous

Definition

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

11-17
5. Terms and Definitions

General subscriber line

Analog telephone lines (Public network)

JBIG coding method

New method of data compression/decompression standardized by the


Joint Bi-level Image Expert Working Group, a subcommittee of the
International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T). Effective for
transferring large and high resolution image data such as GSR.

Manual reception

Receiving a document after talking on the telephone.

Manual transmission

Transmitting a document after talking on the telephone.

Memory

Stores fax and copy image data. By installing expanded memory, much
more image data can be stored in the memory.

Memory reception

When the paper runs out during a facsimile reception, the data is
automatically stored in the memory, and printed out after print paper is
loaded.
Even if the paper runs out when a recipient is out or late at night, the
facsimile receives a document in its entirety.

On-hook Dialing

Dials without picking up a hand set. Touch [On-hook Dial] to use this
function.

PBX

PBX is an abbreviation of private branch exchange. Exchange


equipment is installed in a company or a plant to connect a number of
telephone sets with multiple station lines to enable telecommunications
between the telephone sets.

Push button signal

A signal used on the telephone line. It is used when calling on the push
button line or using push button services. By touching [Tone], the touchtone (PB) line becomes available even if a dial phone line (DP10pps,
DP20pps) is connected.

Quick memory
transmission

Immediately transmits a document by quickly scanning and storing it in


the memory when transmission is possible. p.5-4

Super G3

High speed facsimile transmission mode via analog line recommended


by the International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T).
Using the V.34 facsimile modem and the JBIG coding method, it is
possible to transmit in 2 seconds or under 3 seconds. (When an A4 size
document on which approx. 700 characters are printed is transmitted in
the standard image quality, 3.85 line/mm.)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 11

Definition

Miscellaneous

Terms

11-18

6. Power Failure
Should Power Failure Occurs
This section describes what action to be taken in case of a power failure.
Documents in Memory are Retained for about Two Hours.

Miscellaneous

Chapter 11

Documents in Memory are Retained for about Two Hours.


The documents transmitted or received and stored in memory are retained for about two hours in case of
power failure (provided that the power to the machine has been ON for about 24 hours prior to the power
failure). After the two-hour period, such data may be lost. If any documents are lost due to power failure,
a Memory Clear Report will be automatically printed as soon as power is recovered. It shows the
numbers and destinations of the documents that have been lost.

Programmed Settings are Retained.


The settings made in one-touch dialing keys and others are retained regardless of the period of power
failure. There is no need of reprogramming the settings.

Telephone Cannot be Used.


No telephone call can be made during power failure or when power is OFF.
Calls can, however, be received if the machine is equipped with an Extra Telephone Set.
If an Extra Telephone Set that is usable even during power failure is connected, it can be used for making
and receiving calls.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

11-19

A
Access Code ..........................................8-38, 9-12
Access Code/Access Number .........................2-35
Access Mode Key ...........................................2-19
Account Count Report ....................................9-33
Account List ...................................................9-33
Account Meter ..................................................9-3
Account Meter Procedures .............................9-31
Account Name .......................................8-38, 9-12
Account TSI ..........................................8-38, 9-12
Activity List ....................................................2-36
Activity Report ...............................................9-32
Adding paper ..................................................10-2
Adjusting Facsimile Contrast .........................5-10
Adjusting Facsimile Image Quality ..................5-9
Adjusting Facsimile Reduction ......................5-12
Admin. Management ........................................7-3
Administrator Set .............................................9-3
Alarm Screen ..................................................2-35
Auto Copy Start ..............................................2-33
Auto Drawer Switching ....................................3-5
Auto Panel Reset ............................................2-34
Auto Paper/Auto Size .......................................8-3
Auto Size ........................................................3-12
Automatic Reception and Manual Reception .5-20

Batch ...............................................................8-26
Book/Separation Double-Sided ...................3-33
Book/Separation Single-Sided ....................3-33
Book/Spreadsheet Double-Sided .................3-33
Book/Spreadsheet Single-Sided ..................3-33
Bulletin Boards ...............................................6-33

C
Calling up a Ratio from Memory ...................3-15
Chain Dialing .................................................5-16
Changing the Imaging Unit ..........................10-16
Cleaning ........................................................11-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Clear Key ........................................................2-19


Clearing Counters for Each Account ..............9-11
Clearing the Staple Misfeed .........................10-34
Com. Mode .................................. 8-39, 9-13, 9-28
Com. Password ...............................................9-19
Confidential F CODE Transmission ..............6-31
Control Panel ..................................................2-19
Copy job Recall ................................................7-2
Copy Key ........................................................2-19
Copy Track .......................................................9-3
Cover ..............................................................3-44
Crisscross Grouping .......................................3-21
Crisscross Sorting ...........................................3-21
Cut Off Length ...............................................9-25

D
Data Send ........................................................7-20
Date/Time Set ...................................................8-3
Default Copy Output Levels .............................8-4
Default Device Priority ...................................9-19
Defining the Area of Document to be
Scanned for Transmission ..............................5-14
Density (ADF) ..................................................8-6
Density Priority ................................................8-4
Description of Paper Size and Zoom Ratio
Table .............................................................11-15
Destination Insertion ......................................6-15
Disable Sleep Mode ..........................................9-5
Display Contrast Control Knob ......................2-16
Distribution .....................................................3-60
Double-[2in1] Single-Sided .........................3-33
Double-Sided Double-[2in1] .......................3-31
Double-Sided Double-[4in1] .......................3-32
Double-Sided Double-Sided ........................3-31
Double-Sided Single-[2in1] .........................3-31
Double-Sided Single-[4in1] .........................3-32
Double-Sided Single-Sided .........................3-31
Downloading a Document from a Bulletin
Board (Retrieve) .............................................6-22
Drawer Priority .................................................8-3

E
Edge/Frame Erase ...........................................3-56
Energy Save Mode .........................................2-34
Entering Letters ..............................................7-11
Entering Symbols ...........................................7-11
Extra Scan .......................................................2-19

F
F CODE ....................................... 8-35, 8-38, 9-12
F CODE Password ....................... 8-35, 8-38, 9-12
F CODE Password Reception ........................6-33

Miscellaneous

100 Accounts 1 .................................................9-6


100 Accounts 2 .................................................9-6
1000 Accounts ..................................................9-6
10-Key Pad .....................................................2-19
1-Sided Originals ..............................................4-3
2in1 Receive ...................................................9-25
2in1 Transmission ............................................6-9
2-Sided Originals with Filing Margin along
Left Edges .........................................................4-9
2-Sided Transmission .....................................6-10
4in1 Copy Order ...............................................8-4

Numeric

Chapter 11

Index

11-20
Index

Miscellaneous

Chapter 11

Group ............................................................. 3-18

H
Hints for Hole-Punching Position .................. 3-30
Hints for Stapling ........................................... 3-30
Hints for Stapling Position ............................. 3-26
Hole Punch ..................................................... 3-19
How to Replace the TX Marker Stamp
(Spare TX Marker STAMP) ........................ 10-40

I
Icons ............................................................... 2-24
If no paper matching up to TX Doc. Size? .... 9-25
Image Density ................................................ 3-42
Image Repeat ................................................. 3-58
Incomplete TX Hold ...................................... 9-19
Initial Mode .................................................... 2-25
Initial Settings .................................................. 9-3
Input Accounts ........................................ 9-3, 9-12
Intelligent Sorting ............................................ 8-5
Interrupt Key .................................................. 2-19

L
Language Selected ........................................... 8-3
LCD Back-light Off ....................................... 2-34
Line Selection ................................................ 9-29
Line Type (1), (2) ........................................... 9-18
List of Programming/Setting Items .................. 7-4
Loading the Originals in Document Feeder ... 2-27
Long Document ............................................. 9-25

M
Making 1-Sided Copies from 2-Sided Originals
with Filing Margin along Top Edges ............. 4-15
Making a Telephone Call ............................... 5-22
Making the Users Choice Settings ................. 8-7
Manual Bypass Copying .................................. 3-7
Manual Reception .......................................... 6-28
Manual Transmission ....................................... 6-4
Max. Copy Sets ................................................ 9-4
Max. Print Page .............................................. 9-13
Memorize Paper Size ............................ 3-10, 10-8
Memory Clear Report .................................... 9-32
Memory Recall .............................................. 3-62

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Meter Count ..................................................... 7-2


Mixed Orig. Detection ................................... 2-32
Mixed Original Detection ................................ 8-3
Mode Check Key ........................................... 2-19
Modifying and Deleting Facsimile
Programs ........................................................ 8-32
Modifying or Deleting Abbreviated
Number ........................................................... 8-13
Modifying or Deleting One-Touch Dialing
Number ........................................................... 8-19
Moving the Display Position for
One-Touch Keys ............................................ 8-20
Multiple-in-1 and Booklet Copy Zoom ........... 8-3

N
No. ............................................... 8-35, 8-38, 9-12
No. of RX Call Rings ..................................... 9-24
Non-Sort ......................................................... 3-18

O
OHP Interleaving ........................................... 3-50
One-Touch Dialing ........................................ 2-36
Original Copy Default ................................... 8-3
Output Priority ................................................. 8-5
Output Tray ...................................................... 8-5

FAX Input ........................................................ 7-2


FAX Input Items .............................................. 8-8
Fax Recept Settings ......................................... 9-3
Fax Trans. Settings .......................................... 9-3
Fax/Scan Key ................................................. 2-19
File Margin .................................................... 3-54
Function Combination Matrix ..................... 11-12

P
Page Insertion ................................................. 3-46
Panel Cleaning ............................................... 7-20
Panel Reset Key ............................................. 2-19
Paper Size ......................................................... 3-4
Password Reception ..............................6-29, 9-24
Password TX .........................................6-18, 9-28
Pause Key ....................................................... 2-19
Photo .............................................................. 3-43
Placing the Original ....................................... 2-26
Plug-In Counter, ID Key Reset ........................ 8-4
Polling Reception and Start Timer ................. 6-26
Polling RX ...................................................... 8-28
Polling TX ...................................................... 6-24
Posting a Document on a Bulletin Board ....... 6-19
Print Paper Select ........................................... 9-25
Printing Density ............................................... 8-5
Printing Reports and Lists .............................. 7-21
Priority Contrast .......................... 8-39, 9-13, 9-28
Priority Quality ........................... 8-39, 9-13, 9-28
Priority Screen ............................... 8-6, 8-39, 9-13
Priority Transmission ....................................... 6-7
Programming a Number for Abbreviated
Dialing ............................................................ 8-10
Programming a Number for One-Touch
Dialing ............................................................ 8-16

11-21

Quick Memory Transmission ...........................5-4

R
Real Time Transmission ...................................6-6
Recalling a Job from Memory ........................7-15
Received Document .................... 8-39, 9-13, 9-19
Reception Failures ........................................10-48
Reception Mode .............................................9-24
Reduction ........................................................9-25
Registering Account (Account Input) ............8-38
Registering Relay Groups ..............................8-33
Relay Transmission ..........................................6-5
Relay TX ........................................................8-30
Relay-Station Print .........................................9-29
Reloading the Staple Cartridge .....................10-12
Remote Copy ..................................................6-17
Remote Input Check .................... 8-35, 8-38, 9-12
Remote Multi Copies .....................................6-33
Remote Output Check ....................................8-35
Replacing the Toner Bottle ...........................10-10
Report ...............................................................7-3
Report Printing .................................................9-3
Report Printing Procedures ............................9-33
Report Screen .............................. 8-39, 9-13, 9-32
Report Settings .................................................9-3
Report Settings Procedures ............................9-32
Rotation Print .................................................9-25
RX Time Stamp ..............................................9-24

Scan Key .........................................................2-19


Scanner Dry ......................................................8-5
Second Dial ....................................................9-24
Selecting the Density ......................................3-42
Selecting the Finishing Function ....................3-20
Selecting the Original Copy Type ...............3-34
Selecting the Zoom .........................................3-12
Self-ID ............................................................9-18
Self-Telephone #1, 2 ......................................9-18
Separate Scan .................................................3-61
Serial Broadcast Transmission .........................6-2
Setting a Copy Limit for Each Account .........9-10
Setting Admin. Management ............................9-2
Setting Indexes ...............................................8-22
Setting List .....................................................9-33
Setting the Account Number ............................9-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

T
Telephone Problems .....................................10-49
Terms and Definitions ..................................11-16
Text .................................................................3-42
Text/Photo ......................................................3-43
The machine is not functioning as
designed ........................................................10-46
Timer Transmission ..........................................6-8
Title .................................................................8-35
Touch Panel ....................................................2-19
Transmission Failures ...................................10-47
TSI ......................................8-39, 9-13, 9-18, 9-28
TSI Information ..............................................6-14
Turning ON and OFF .....................................2-25
TX .......................................8-24, 8-39, 9-13, 9-28
TX Marker ..........................6-12, 8-39, 9-13, 9-28
TX Marker STAMP UNIT .............................2-18
TX Report ...........................6-16, 8-39, 9-13, 9-32

U
Unselectable Cassette .....................................9-25
User Management .............................................7-3
Users Choice ...................................................7-2

Miscellaneous

Setting the Communication Mode ..................5-18


Setting the Copy Track Function ......................9-7
Setting up a Bulletin Board ............................8-35
Settings for Facsimile Programs .....................8-23
Shift Grouping ................................................3-21
Shift Sorting ....................................................3-21
Should Power Failure Occurs .......................11-18
Single-[2in1] Single-Sided ..........................3-33
Single-Sided Booklet Creation ....................3-32
Single-Sided Double-[2in1] .........................3-31
Single-Sided Double-[4in1] .........................3-32
Single-Sided Double-Sided .........................3-31
Single-Sided Single-[2in1] ..........................3-31
Single-Sided Single-[4in1] ..........................3-32
Single-Sided Single-Sided ...........................3-31
Sleep ...............................................................2-34
Sleep Mode Setting ...........................................8-4
Small Originals .............................................8-5
Some Precautions for Making Copies ............3-41
Sort .................................................................3-18
Special Paper ....................................................8-3
Special Paper Setting ........................................3-6
Specifications .................................................11-2
Staple ..............................................................3-19
Start Key .........................................................2-19
Stop Key .........................................................2-19
Storing a Job ...................................................7-12
Storing a Ratio in Memory .............................3-16

Programming an Index for One-Touch Keys .8-22


Programming Self-Abbreviated Number .......8-34
Programming the Access Code ........................9-9
PSTN/Ext Switch 1, 2 ....................................9-18

Chapter 11

Index

11-22

Miscellaneous

Chapter 11

Index

Using Abbreviated Dialing for


Transmission .................................................... 5-7
Using Facsimile Program for Transmission .... 5-8
Using Large-Size Originals ........................... 4-21
Using One-Touch Dialing for Transmission ... 5-6
Using the Dehumidify Function .................... 7-18
Using the Document Feeder .......................... 2-26
Using the SADF Mode .................................. 2-29
Using the Toner Replenisher Function .......... 7-19
Using the Utility Mode .................................... 7-2
Utility Key ..................................................... 2-19

W
What does each message mean? .................. 10-42
What is F CODE? .......................................... 6-30
When the message A malfunction was
detected. appears ........................................ 10-41
When this type of copy is produced ............. 10-43

X
X/Y Zoom ........................................................ 2-3

Z
Zoom Ratio .................................................... 3-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Copyright
2001 MINOLTA CO., LTD.


   
     

    
    




 
 

   
  


 !" #



Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

$$" ! 
" %&   " ! '" (' )*))" +

You might also like